Ricoh Lf 125 H915 User Manual

Operating Instructions  
LF 125 (H915)  
For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information  
in this manual before you use it.  
Safety Information  
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.  
Safety During Operation  
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:  
WARNING:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are  
not followed, could result in death or serious injury.  
CAUTION:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not  
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.  
WARNING:  
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an  
extension cord.  
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power  
cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.  
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not  
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.  
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not  
the cable) if any of the following occurs:  
•You spill something into the machine.  
•You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.  
•The external housing of your machine has been damaged.  
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when  
exposed to an open flame.  
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.  
• Dispose of the used toner bottle in accordance with the local regulations.  
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire  
or an electric shock might occur.  
ii  
 
CAUTION:  
• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving  
the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the  
machine.  
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the  
cable).  
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the  
machine.  
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner bottle out of the reach of children.  
• Be careful not to cut yourself on any sharp edges when you reach inside the product to  
remove misfed sheets of paper or masters.  
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended supply waste at  
household waste collection points. Disposal can take place at an authorized dealer.  
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label  
indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise, an injury might occur.  
Power Supply  
The socket-outlet shall be in stalled near the product and shall be easily accessible.  
Ozone Safety  
This product generates ozone during operation.  
Normally, the ozone level is safe for operators. If ozone odor may appear, ventilate the room.  
For Fax or Telephone  
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or  
laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Avoid using a telephone during an  
electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use a  
telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.  
Laser Safety:  
This equipment is considered a class 1 laser device. This equipment contains a 5 milliwatt, 760-800  
nanometer wavelength, AlGaAs laser diode. The following marking is attached on the back of the  
equipment.  
Caution:  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in  
this Operating Instructions might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
For North America  
Laser Safety:  
This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR subchapter J for class 1 laser products.  
This equipment contains a 5 milliwatt, 760–800 nanometer wavelength, AlGaAs laser diode.  
Caution:  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this  
Operating Instructions might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
iii  
Declaration of Conformity  
Notice to Users in EEA Countries  
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC  
of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.  
Notice to Users Accessing Analog PSTN in EEA Countries  
This product is designed to be able to access analog PSTN in all EEA countries. Local PSTN  
compatibility is dependent on software switch settings. Please contact your service  
representative if relocating this product to another country. In the event of problems, please  
contact your service representative in the first instance.  
FAX1130L/FAX1170L/F230/F250/LF120/LF125m : The CE declaration of Comformity is available on the  
Internet at URL :  
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc  
IF3030/IF3035 : The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL:  
http://jboard.danka.de/jboard/produkte/index.htmlo and selecting the product applicable.  
iv  
Positions of Labels and Hallmarks for  
WARNING and  
This machine has labels for  
CAUTION Labels  
WARNING and  
CAUTION at the positions shown below. For  
safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.  
*
*
*This label is stuck to hot surfaces. Be careful not to touch these areas.  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power  
switch:  
means POWER ON.  
means POWER OFF.  
v
NOTICE  
Note to users in the United States of America  
Notice:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,  
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with  
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is  
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning  
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more  
of the following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.  
Caution  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in USA only).  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use  
a computer or other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message  
unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each  
transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent  
and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the  
message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other  
entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any  
other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)  
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the  
following steps: Follow the FAX HEADER programming procedure in the Programming  
chapter of the operating instructions to enter the business identification and telephone  
number of the terminal or business. This information is transmitted with your document  
by the FAX HEADER feature. In addition to the information, be sure to program the date  
and time into your machine.  
vi  
USA  
FCC Requirements  
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and requirements adopted by the  
ACTA. On the cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information,  
a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. If requested, this number must  
be provided to the telephone company.  
2. This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.  
3. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone  
network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted  
by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product.  
It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See  
installation instructions for detail.  
4. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a  
telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing  
in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not  
exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a  
line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for  
this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX.  
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of  
0.3).  
5. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will  
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if  
advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon  
as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you  
believe it is necessary.  
6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or  
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the  
telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary  
modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.  
7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please  
contact RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX. If the equipment  
is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you  
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.  
8. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error  
indication), refer to the solving problems section in this manual.  
9. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility  
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.  
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO  
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:  
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before  
hanging up.  
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late  
evenings.  
CANADA  
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to  
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any  
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the  
devices does not exceed five.  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.  
Note:  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
vii  
Differences Between British and American English  
British English  
(Re)dialling  
Colour  
American English  
(Re)dialing  
Color  
Emphasise  
Recognise  
Organise  
Authorise  
Cancelling  
Customise  
Socket  
Emphasize  
Recognize  
Organize  
Authorize  
Canceling  
Customize  
Jack  
Labelling  
Labeling  
WARNING  
• Do not disassemble the machine as it may give you an electric shock.  
• If you print large amount of copies, the surface of the output tray may become  
hot. Be careful not to touch the surface, especially for children.  
viii  
CONTENTS  
ix  
Setting the Paper Type and Size for the  
x
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing  
xi  
Chapter 5: PRINTING  
(FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
Chapter 6: SCANNING  
(FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
xii  
xiii  
GETTING STARTED  
1
Thank you for purchasing this multifunctional product.  
Your machine provides you with printing, copying,  
scanning, and faxing functions!  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for  
setting up your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
 
Setting Up Your Machine  
Unpacking  
Remove the machine and all accessories from the packing carton.  
Make sure that the machine has been packed with the following  
items. If there is a missing item, contact the retailer where you  
bought the machine:  
AC Power Cord*  
Starter Toner Cartridge  
Telephone Line Cord*  
(Not packed with Asia model)  
CD-ROM**  
(Not packed with Asia model)  
Quick Install Guide  
Quick Guide  
Handset  
(for America only)  
Cardle  
(for America only)  
1.2  
GETTING STARTED  
   
1
USB Cable  
(for America only)  
Document Output Support  
Brand plaque***  
Key layout sheet  
(for Europe only /May already be  
affixed to the machine in some  
regions)  
(May already be affixed to the machine  
in some regions)  
* The appearance of the power cord and the telephone line cord may differ  
according to your country’s specifications.  
** The CD-ROM contains the Type 1200 Driver, the Operating Instructions and  
the Adobe Acrobat Reader program.  
***Peel off the brand plaque’s backing, and then stick down the plaque in the  
control panel’s left corner.  
NOTES  
:
• You should use the telephone line cord which is supplied with  
your machine. If you are replacing it with another vendor’s, it  
should be AWG #26 or larger telephone line cord.  
• The power cord must be plugged into a grounded power socket.  
• Components may differ from one country to another.  
GETTING STARTED 1.3  
Remove the packing tape from the front, back and sides of the  
machine.  
Tape  
1.4  
GETTING STARTED  
Selecting a Location  
1
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air  
circulation. Allow extra space for opening covers and trays.  
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight  
or sources of heat, cold and humidity. Do not set the machine  
close to the edge of your desk or table.  
Clearance Space  
Front: 482.6 mm (enough space so that the paper tray can  
be removed)  
Back: 250 mm (enough space for ventilation)  
Right: 100 mm  
Left: 100 mm (enough space for ventilation)  
GETTING STARTED 1.5  
 
Understanding the Component  
Location  
These are the main components of your machine:  
Front View  
Automatic Document  
Feeder  
Document Input  
Support  
Control Panel (See page 1.7)  
Document Output  
Tray  
Front Output Tray (Face down)  
Document  
Guides  
Paper Output  
Extension  
Front Cover  
Toner Cartridge  
Paper Level  
Indicator  
Handset  
(for America only)  
Manual Feeder  
Manual Feeder  
Guides  
Paper Tray  
Rear View  
Rear Cover  
Rear Output  
Slot (Face up)  
EXT Jack  
*
Line Jack  
USB Connector  
(for MFP model only)  
Power Switch  
*
If your country has a different  
telephone connection system,  
this socket may be blocked.  
Parallel Connector  
(for MFP model only)  
AC Power Cord  
Connector  
1.6  
GETTING STARTED  
     
Control Panel Functions  
1
Use to store frequently-dialed fax number and  
dial them with a touch of the buttons.  
1
Scrolls through the options available for the  
selected menu item.  
Confirms the selection on the display.  
2
3
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
menus available.  
Returns you to the upper menu level.  
Displays the current status and prompts  
during an operation.  
GETTING STARTED 1.7  
   
Allows you to select the fax receiving mode.  
• Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax  
numbers using a one or two-digit speed dial  
or group number for automatic dialing and  
edit the stored numbers.  
• Allows you to print a Phone book list.  
4
F
A
X
Adjusts the resolution of the documents for  
the current fax job.  
Allows you to send a fax to multiple  
destinations.  
Engages the telephone line.  
Redials the last number in Standby mode or  
inserts a pause into a fax number in Edit  
mode.  
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric  
characters.  
5
Adjusts the brightness of the documents for  
the current copy job.  
*1  
This button is called “Darkness” in this manual.  
Selects the document type for the current  
copy job.  
This button is called “Original Type” in this manual.  
6
C
O
P
Y
*2  
Makes a copy smaller or larger than the  
original document.  
Selects the number of copies.  
Stops an operation at any time.  
In Standby mode, clears/stop the copy  
options, such as the darkness, the document  
type setting, the copy size and the number of  
copies.  
7
Starts a job.  
1.8  
GETTING STARTED  
Attaching Accessories  
1
Document Output Support  
Insert the two tabs on the supplied document output support  
into the slots on both sides of the paper output tray.  
Fold out the extender, if necessary.  
NOTE:When detaching the document  
output tray, detach it by pressing the  
front portion of document output  
tray as seen from the picture. As this  
time, even though the dull sound is  
heard the components are safe from  
damge.  
GETTING STARTED 1.9  
   
Handset and Handset Cradle( for America only)  
1
Plug the end of the coiled cord of the handset into the jack  
on the left side of your machine.  
2
Holding the cradle as shown, attach the handset cradle to  
the machine.  
Insert the two tabs of the cradle into the slots on the left side of  
the machine as shown.  
Push the cradle toward the machine until it locks into place.  
NOTES  
:
• The cradle and handset must be installed for correct operation of the set.  
To remove the cradle, push it down, pressing the latch on the bottom  
of the cradle  
.
1.10  
GETTING STARTED  
   
Installing the Toner Cartridge  
1
1
Open the front cover.  
2
Remove the starter toner cartridge from its bag. Gently roll  
the cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly  
inside the cartridge.  
Thoroughly rolling the cartridge will assure the maximum  
copies per cartridge.  
NOTES  
:
To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light for  
more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if left  
exposed for more than a few minutes.  
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
GETTING STARTED 1.11  
   
3
Slide the toner cartridge into the machine until it locks into  
place completely.  
4
Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely  
closed.  
1.12  
GETTING STARTED  
Loading Paper  
1
You can load approximately 250 sheets.  
To load a stack of Letter-sized paper:  
1
Pull open the paper tray and remove it from the machine.  
2
Push down on the pressure plate until it locks into place.  
3
Fan the edges of the paper stack to separate the pages.  
Then tap the stack on a flat surface to even it up.  
GETTING STARTED 1.13  
   
4
Insert the paper stack into the paper tray with the side you  
want to print facing up.  
NOTE: If you want to load a different size of paper, you need to  
adjust the paper guides. For details, see page 1.15.  
5
Pay attention to the paper limit mark on the left inside wall  
of the tray. Paper overloading may cause paper jams.  
6
Insert and slide the paper tray back into the machine.  
NOTE: After you load the paper, you need to set up your machine  
for the paper type and size you loaded. See page 1.33 for copying  
and faxing, or page 5.7 for PC-printing.  
1.14  
GETTING STARTED  
Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Tray  
1
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you  
need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.  
1
After pressing and unlatching the guide lock, slide the  
paper length guide out completely to extend the paper tray  
to its full length.  
2
After inserting paper into the tray, slide in the guide until it  
lightly touches the end of the paper stack.  
For the paper smaller than Letter, adjust the front paper  
length guide.  
GETTING STARTED 1.15  
 
3
Pinching the paper width guide as shown, move it toward the  
stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack.  
NOTES  
:
• Do not push the paper width guide far enough to cause the  
materials to warp.  
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.  
Making Connections  
Plug the telephone line cord into the LINE jack and the  
other end into the wall jack.  
To the walljack  
If you want to use your machine for receiving both faxes  
and voice calls, you will need to connect a telephone and/or  
answering machine to your machine.  
1.16  
GETTING STARTED  
       
1
NOTE: In the United Kingdom, if a three-wire type (SHUNT-wire,  
older equipment) telephone or answering machine is connected to  
the EXT jack on the machine, the external equipment will fail to ring  
when receiving an incoming call as the machine is designed to  
operate with the latest technology. To prevent this incompatibility,  
use two-wire (newer equipment) telephone or answering machines.  
GETTING STARTED 1.17  
Connecting to your computer  
(for MFP model only)  
Plug the USB printer cable into the connector on the back of  
the printer.  
You must use a USB 1.1 compliant cable that is no more  
than 3 m in length.  
If you want to use a parallel printer cable, purchase only  
IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable and connect it to the  
parallel connector on your machine.  
Push the metal clips down to fit inside the notches on the  
cable plug.  
NOTES  
:
• You only need to connect one of the cables mentioned above. Do  
not use the parallel and the USB cables at the same time.  
• If you are using a USB cable, you must be running Windows 98/  
Me/2000/XP.  
• When using the USB connection, your machine provides two USB  
modes; Fast and Slow. Fast is the default mode. Some PC users  
may experience poor USB function in the default mode. If this  
occurs, select the Slow mode to achieve successful results. For  
details about changing the USB mode, see page 8.21.  
1.18  
GETTING STARTED  
       
Turning the Machine On  
1
1
Plug one end of the supplied three-pronged electrical type  
cord into the AC socket on the machine and the other end  
into a properly grounded AC outlet.  
2
Press the power switch to turn the machine on.  
To the AC walljack  
WARNINGS  
:
• The fusing area inside the rear part of your machine becomes  
hot once the machine is turned on. Be careful when you access  
this area.  
• Do not disassemble the machine when it is turned on as it may  
give you an electric shock.  
GETTING STARTED 1.19  
   
Installing Software  
About Software(for MFP model only)  
You must install software using the supplied CD-ROM after you  
have set up your machine and connected it to your computer.  
The CD-ROM includes:  
• Software  
• Operating Instructions  
• Adobe Acrobat Reader  
The CD-ROM provides you with the following software:  
Type 1200 Driver  
To use your machine as a printer and scanner in Windows, you  
must install the Type 1200 Driver. For information about  
installing the Type 1200 Driver in Windows, see page 1.20.  
Remote Control Panel  
This Windows-based program is automatically installed when  
you install the Type 1200 Driver. For information about using  
the program, see page 4.36.  
1.20  
GETTING STARTED  
       
Printer Driver Features  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
1
• Paper source selection  
• Paper size, orientation and media type  
• number of copies  
The following table lists a general overview of features  
supported by your printer drivers.  
Printer Driver  
Feature  
Win9x/Me  
Win2000/XP  
WinNT4.0  
Toner save  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Print quality option  
Poster printing  
Multiple pages per  
sheet (N-up)  
Y
Y
Y
Fit to page printing  
Scale printing  
Watermark  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Overlay  
GETTING STARTED 1.21  
 
Installing Software in Windows  
(for MFP model only)  
System Requirements  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the minimum  
requirements.  
Supported Operating System  
• Windows 95 OSR2  
• Windows 98/Windows 98 SE  
• Windows Me  
• Windows NT 4 Workstation or Server with Service Pack 3  
• Windows 2000 Professional or Advanced Server  
• Windows XP Home edition or Professional.  
Minimal Requirements  
• Disk space: 120 MB for installation  
• Memory: 64 MB  
• CPU: Pentium II 233 or higher  
• Required software: Internet Explorer 4.01  
Recommended  
• Disk space: 300 MB for installation  
• Memory: 128 MB  
• CPU: Pentium II 400 or higher  
• Required software: Internet Explorer 5.5  
NOTES  
:
• For Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, the system administrator should  
install software.  
• Windows 95 versions prior to OSR2 are not recommended due to  
incompatibility with OLE/COM libraries.  
1.22  
GETTING STARTED  
       
Installing Software in windows  
1
NOTES  
:
• Cancel the “New Hardware Found” window when your  
computer boots up.  
• Make sure that your machine is turned on and connected to your  
computer’s parallel port or USB port before installing  
software. Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 do not support the  
USB connection.  
1
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run and an maintenance  
window appears.  
If the maintenance window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter of your drive and click OK.  
NOTES: If your machine is not connected to the computer, the  
following window will appear.  
• After connecting the machine, click Next.  
• If you want to skip the connection status, click Next, and No to  
the following screen. Then the installation will start and the test  
page will not be printed at the end of the installation.  
GETTING STARTED 1.23  
 
2
Choose the installation type.  
Typical: Installs the common software for your printer,  
such as printer driver, Twain driver, Remote Control Panel.  
This is recommeded for most users.  
Custom: Allows you to choose the language of software  
and the components you want to install. After selecting the  
language and the component(s), click Next.  
View Operating Instructions: Allows you to view this  
Operating Instructions. If your computer doesn’t have  
Adobe Acrobat, click on this option and it will automatically  
install Adobe Acrobat for you.  
3
4
After the installation is finished, the window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the check box and click Next.  
When the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
1.24  
GETTING STARTED  
5
Click Finish.  
1
NOTES  
:
• When you want to use your machine with the parallel cable,  
remove the USB cable and connect the parallel cable. Then  
reinstall the printer driver; select Start ¡ Programs ¡ Type  
1200 ¡ Maintenance ¡ Repair ¡ Printer. If you have  
replaced the parallel cable with the USB cable, do the same to  
reinstall the driver.  
• If your printer doesn’t work properly, reinstall the printer driver.  
Repairing Software(for MFP model only)  
Repairing is required if your installation fails or software does  
not work properly.  
1
You can select Start  
¡Maintenance.  
¡
Programs  
¡
Type 1200  
Otherwise, insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run and an maintenance  
window appears.  
If the maintenance window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter of your drive and click OK.  
2
Click Repair.  
GETTING STARTED 1.25  
   
NOTES: If your machine is not connected to the computer, the  
following window will appear.  
• After connecting the machine, click Next.  
• If you want to skip the connection status, click Next, and No to  
the following screen. Then the installation will start and the test  
page will not be printed at the end of the installation.  
3
Select the components you want to reinstall and click Next.  
4
After the installation is finished, the window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the check box and click Next.  
5
6
When the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish.  
1.26  
GETTING STARTED  
1
Removing Software(for MFP model only)  
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading software or if your  
installation fails.  
1
You can select Start  
Maintenance.  
¡
Programs  
¡
Type 1200  
¡
Otherwise, insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run and an maintenance  
window appears.  
If the maintenance window does not appear, click Start  
and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter of your drive and click OK.  
2
Click Remove.  
Then you will see a component list so that you can remove  
any of them individually.  
If you want to uninstall the printer driver, check Printer.  
If you want to uninstall the Twain driver, check Twain.  
If you want to uninstall the Remote Control Panel, check  
Remote Control Panel.  
3
4
After selecting items you wish to remove, click Next.  
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
click Yes.  
The selected driver and all of its components are removed  
from your computer.  
5
When the uninstallation is done, click Finish.  
GETTING STARTED 1.27  
     
Setting Up the Machine  
System  
Changing the Display Language  
To change the language that displays on the display of the  
control panel, follow these steps:  
1
2
3
4
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Language” appears  
on the bottom line of the display.  
Press Enter. The current setting appears on the bottom  
line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the language you  
want appears on the display.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
1.28  
GETTING STARTED  
     
Setting the Machine ID  
1
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax  
number on any fax you send. The Machine ID, containing your  
telephone number and name or company name, will be printed  
at the top of each page sent from your machine.  
1
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display. The first available menu item, “Machine ID”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter. The display asks you to enter the fax number.  
If there is a number already set, the number appears.  
Enter your fax number using the number keypad.  
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the  
button to delete the last digit.  
4
5
Press Enter when the number on the display is correct. The  
display asks you to enter the ID.  
Enter your name or company name using the number  
keypad.  
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the number  
keypad, and include special symbols by pressing the 0  
button.  
For details on how to use the number keypad to enter  
alphanumeric characters, see page 1.30.  
If you want to enter the same letter or number in  
succession (e.g. SS, AA, 777), enter one digit, move the  
cursor by pressing the  
button and enter the next digit.  
NOTE: When “Id” is printed at the top of each page you transmit,  
only the first 20 digits can be printed on the pages received at the  
other end.  
If you want to insert a space in the name, you can also use  
the  
button to move the cursor to skip the position.  
6
7
Press Enter when the name on the display is correct.  
Press Clear/Stop to return to Standby mode.  
GETTING STARTED 1.29  
   
Entering Characters Using the Number  
Keypad  
As you perform various tasks, you need to enter names and  
numbers. For example, when you set up your machine, you  
enter your name or your company’s name and telephone  
number. When you store one or two digit speed dial or group dial  
numbers, you may also enter the corresponding names.  
To enter alphanumeric characters:  
1
When you are prompted to enter a letter,  
locate the button labeled with the  
character you want. Press the button  
until the correct letter appears on the  
display.  
For example, to enter the letter O, press  
6, labeled with “MNO.”  
Each time you press 6, the display shows  
a different letter, M, N, O and finally 6.  
You can enter special characters, such as space, plus sign,  
2
3
To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.  
If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the  
cursor by pressing the  
button and then press the button  
labeled with the letter you want. The cursor moves to the  
right and the next letter appears on the display.  
You can enter a space by pressing the  
button.  
When you finish entering letters, press Enter.  
1.30  
GETTING STARTED  
   
Keypad Letters and Numbers  
1
Key  
1
Assigned numbers, letters or characters  
1
Space  
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
C
F
I
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
K
L
5
M
P
N
O
6
Q
R
V
S
8
7
T
U
W
+
X
Y
Z
9
-
,
.
/
*
#
&
0
Changing Numbers or Names  
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press  
the button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the  
correct numbers or characters.  
Inserting a Pause  
With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9,  
for example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases,  
you must insert a pause in the telephone number. You can insert  
a pause while you are setting up one-touch or speed dial  
numbers.  
To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place  
while entering the telephone number. A –” appears on the  
display at the corresponding location.  
GETTING STARTED 1.31  
 
Setting the Date and Time  
The current date and time are shown on the display when your  
machine is on and ready to work. All of your faxes will have the  
date and time printed on them.  
NOTE: If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the  
correct time and date once the power is restored.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Date & Time”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad.  
Month  
Day  
= 01 ~ 12  
= 01 ~ 31  
Year  
= requires all four digits  
Hour  
= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)  
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)  
Minute  
= 00 ~ 59  
NOTE: The date format may differ from each country.  
You can also use the scroll button ( or ) to move the  
cursor under the digit you want to correct and enter a new  
number.  
4
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator,  
pressing the  
or  
button immediately moves the cursor  
to the indicator.  
You can change the clock mode to 24-hour format (e.g.  
01:00 PM as 13:00). For details, see page 1.33.  
5
Press Enter when the time and date on the display is  
correct.  
When you enter a wrong number, the machine beeps and  
does not proceed to the next step. If this happens, just  
reenter the correct number.  
1.32  
GETTING STARTED  
   
Changing the Clock Mode  
1
You can set your machine to display the current time using  
either 12-hour or 24-hour format.  
1
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Clock Mode”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
The clock mode currently set for the machine displays.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to select the other mode  
and then press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Setting the Paper Type and Size  
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper type  
and size using the control panel buttons. These settings will apply  
to Fax and Copy modes. For PC-printing, you need to select the  
paper type and size in the application program you use.  
1
Press Menu.  
The display shows “Paper Setting” on the top line and the  
first menu item, “Paper Type,on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper type you  
are using and press Enter to save it.  
4
Press the ¤button to scroll to “Paper Size” and press  
Enter to access the menu item.  
5
6
Press Enter when “Tray Paper” displays on the bottom line.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper size you  
are using and press Enter to save it.  
7
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
GETTING STARTED 1.33  
       
Setting Sounds  
You can control the following sounds:  
• Ringer: You can adjust the ringer volume.  
• Key Sound: With this option set to “On,” a key tone sounds  
each time any key is pressed.  
• Alarm Sound: You can turn the alarm sound on or off. With  
this option set to “On,an alarm tone sounds when an error  
occurs or fax communication ends.  
• Speaker: You can turn on or off the sounds from the  
telephone line through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a  
fax tone. With this option set to “Comm.,the speaker is on  
until the remote machine answers.  
You can adjust the speaker volume level using the On Hook  
Dial button or the handset(for America only).  
Speaker, Ringer, Key Sound and Alarm Sound  
1
Press Menu until “Sound/Volume” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the  
options. Press Enter when you see the sound option you  
want.  
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the status or  
loudness you want for the option you have selected.  
For the ringer volume, you can select from “Off, Low, Med”  
and “High. Setting “Off” means that the ringer turns off. The  
machine works normally even if the ringer is turned off.  
4
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
If necessary, repeat steps 2 through 4.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
1.34  
GETTING STARTED  
         
Speaker Volume  
1
To adjust the volume using the On Hook Dial button:  
1
2
Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from the speaker.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you hear the  
loudness you want. The display shows the current volume  
level.  
3
Press Clear/Stop to save the change and return to  
Standby mode.  
To adjust the volume using the handset:(for America only)  
1
2
Pick up the handset. A dial tone sounds from the earpice.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you find the loudness  
you want. You can select either “High” or “Low.  
3
Press Enter to save selection and replace the handset.  
NOTE: You can adjust the speaker volume only when the  
telephone line is connected.  
GETTING STARTED 1.35  
 
Using the Save Mode  
Power Save Mode  
Power Save mode allows your machine to reduce power  
consumption when it is not in actual use. You can turn this mode  
on by selecting the length of time for which the machine waits  
after a job is printed before it switches to a reduced power state.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Power Save”  
appears on the bottom line. Press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “On” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
Selecting “Off” means that Power Save mode turns off.  
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the time settings you  
want appears.  
The available options are 5, 10, 15, 30 and 45 (minutes).  
Press Enter to save the selection.  
5
6
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
1.36  
GETTING STARTED  
     
PAPER HANDLING  
2
This chapter introduces you to the basics of selecting  
print materials and loading them into your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
   
Selecting Print Materials  
You can print on a variety of print materials, such as plain paper,  
envelopes, labels, *transparencies* and so on. Always use print  
materials that meet the guidelines for use with this machine.  
See “Paper Specification” on page A.5. To get the best possible  
print quality, use only high-quality copier-grade paper.  
* for MFP model only  
When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
• Desired outcome: The paper you choose should be  
appropriate for your project.  
• Size: You can use any size paper that fits easily within the  
paper adjusters of the paper tray.  
• Weight: Your machine supports paper weights as follows:  
- 16 ~ 24 lbs (60 ~ 90 g/m2) bond for the paper tray  
- 16 ~ 43 lbs (60 ~ 163 g/m2) bond for the manual feeder  
• Brightness: Some papers are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the paper affects  
how crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
NOTE: Using print materials that dose not conform to the  
specifications listed on page A.5 may cause problems that may  
require service. This service is not covered by the warranty or  
service agreements.  
Type, Input Sources and Capacities  
Input Source/Capacity*  
Paper Type  
Paper Tray Manual Feeder  
Plain paper  
Envelope**  
Labels  
250  
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
Transparency films  
Card stocks  
1
-
*
Maximum capacity may be reduced depending on the paper thickness.  
** for MFP model only  
2.2  
PAPER HANDLING  
       
Guidelines for Paper and Special Materials  
When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other special  
material, keep these guidelines in mind:  
• Always use paper and other materials that conform with the  
specifications listed under “Paper Specification” on page A.5.  
• Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper  
can cause paper jams and the poor print quality.  
2
• Use only high quality copier grade paper for the best print  
quality.  
• Avoid paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or a  
texture that is too smooth or too rough. Paper jams may  
occur.  
• Store paper in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use.  
Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not  
place heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is  
packaged or unpackaged. Keep it away from moisture, or  
other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl.  
• Store unused materials at temperatures between 15 oC and  
30 oC (59 oF to 86 oF). The relative humidity should be  
between 10 % and 70 %.  
• During storage, you should use moisture-proof wrap, such as  
any plastic container or bag, to prevent dust and moisture  
from contaminating your paper.  
• Load special paper types one sheet at a time.  
• Only use materials specifically recommended for use in laser  
printers.  
To prevent special materials, such as transparencies and label  
sheets from sticking together, remove them as they prints  
out.  
• For envelopes:  
- Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp, well  
creased folds.  
- Do not use envelopes with clasps and snaps.  
- Do not use envelopes with windows, coated lining, self-  
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.  
- Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
• For transparencies(for MFP model only):  
- Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the  
machine.  
- Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time.  
Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty  
printing.  
PAPER HANDLING 2.3  
   
- To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them and  
coated paper carefully.  
- To avoid fading, do not expose the printed transparencies to  
prolonged sunlight.  
• For labels(for MFP model only):  
- Verify that their adhesive material can tolerate fusing  
temperature of 200 oC (392o F) for 0.1 second.  
- Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material  
between them. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off  
during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed  
adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.  
- Do not load a sheet of them through the machine more than  
once. The adhesive backing is designed for one pass  
through the machine.  
- Do not use labels that are separating from the backing  
sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.  
• Do not use Carbonless paper and Tracing paper. They could  
make smell of chemicals and damage your machine.  
Selecting an Output Location  
The machine has two output locations; the rear output slot (face  
up) and the front output tray (face down).  
To use the front output tray, make sure that the rear cover is  
closed. To use the rear output slot, open the rear cover.  
NOTES  
:
• If paper coming out of the front output tray has problems, such  
as excessive curl, try printing to the rear output slot.  
To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear cover while  
the machine is printing.  
2.4  
PAPER HANDLING  
   
Printing to the Front Output Tray (Face down)  
The front output tray collects printed paper face-down in correct  
order. The tray should be used for most print jobs.  
2
Printing to the Rear Output Slot (Face up)  
Using the rear output slot, paper comes out of the machine face up.  
Printing from the manual feeder to the rear output slot provides  
the straight paper path. Using the rear output slot might  
improve the output quality with the following:  
• envelopes  
• labels(for MFP model only)  
• small custom-sized paper  
• postcards  
• transparencies(for MFP model only)  
PAPER HANDLING 2.5  
       
To use the rear output slot:  
Open the rear cover by pulling it upward.  
1
WARNING: The fusing area inside the rear part of your machine  
becomes hot once the machine is turned on. Be careful when you  
access this area.  
2
If you do not want to use the rear output slot, close the  
rear cover. The pages stack on the front output tray.  
2.6  
PAPER HANDLING  
Loading Paper in the Paper Tray  
The paper tray can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of 20 lb plain  
paper. For faxing and copying, you can use A4-, Letter- or Legal-  
sized paper only. For PC-printing, you can use many different  
sizes of paper; see page A.5.  
2
The paper level indicator on the front of the paper tray shows  
the amount of paper currently left in the tray. When the tray is  
empty, the indicator of the bar is lowered.  
❷¤Paper full  
Paper empty œ  
To load paper, pull open the paper tray and load paper with the  
print side face down.  
You can load letterhead paper with the design side face down.  
The top edge of the sheet with the logo should be placed at the  
front side of the tray.  
For details about loading paper in the paper tray, see “Loading  
NOTES  
:
• If you experience problems with paper feed, place the paper in  
the manual feeder.  
• You can load up to 150 sheets of previously printed paper. The  
printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the top  
side. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper  
around. Note that the print quality is not guaranteed.  
PAPER HANDLING 2.7  
   
Using the Manual Feeder  
Use the manual feeder to print transparencies, labels, envelopes  
or postcards in addition to making quick runs of paper types or  
sizes that are not currently loaded in the paper tray.  
Postcards, 3.5 by 5.83 in.(index) cards and other custom-sized  
materials can be printed with this printer. The minimum size is  
76 by 127 mm (3.0 by 5.0 in.) and the maximum size is 216 by  
356 mm (8.5 by 14 in.)  
Acceptable print materials are plain paper with sizes ranging  
from 100 x 148 mm (3.9 x 5.8 in.) to Legal, 216 x 356 mm (8.5  
x 14 in.), the largest size acceptable, and weighing between 16  
lb and 32 lb.  
NOTES  
:
• Always load only the print materials specified in the  
Specifications on page A.5 to avoid paper jams and print quality  
problems.  
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before  
loading them into the manual feeder.  
• When you print on 76 mm X 127 mm (3 X 5 in.) sized media with  
loading into the tray, open the rear output tray.  
1
Load a sheet of the print material with the print side face  
up into the center of the manual feeder.  
For envelopes, load a sheet with the flap side face down  
and with the stamp area on the top left side.  
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid  
touching the print side. Oils from your fingers can cause  
print quality problems.  
NOTE: You must open the rear output slot when you print on  
transparencies. If not, they may tear while exiting the machine.  
2.8  
PAPER HANDLING  
   
2
Adjust the paper guide to the width of the print material.  
2
NOTE: When printing on previously printed paper from the  
manual feeder, the printed side should be facing down with an  
uncurled edge to the machine. If you experience problems with  
paper feed, turn the paper around.  
3
Open the rear cover to use the rear output slot.  
4
After printing, close the rear cover.  
PAPER HANDLING 2.9  
Setting the Paper Type and Size for the  
Manual Feeder  
After loading paper in the manual feeder, you need to set the  
correct paper type and size using the control panel buttons.  
These settings will apply to Copy mode. For PC-printing, you  
need to select the paper size in the application program you use.  
To set the paper size for the manual feeder:  
1
Press Menu.  
The display shows “Paper Setting” on the top line and the  
first item, “Paper Type,on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper type you  
are using and press Enter to save it.  
4
5
6
7
Press the ¤button to scroll to “Paper Size” and press  
Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to display “Manual Feed” on  
the bottom line. Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper size you  
are using and press Enter to save it.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
2.10  
PAPER HANDLING  
     
COPYING  
3
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying  
documents.  
This chapter includes:  
 
Loading Paper for Copying  
The instructions for loading print materials are the same  
whether you are printing, faxing or copying. For coping, you can  
use Letter-, A4-, Legal-sized print materials. For further details,  
loading in the manual feeder.  
Preparing a Document  
Using the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder), you can load up  
to 20 documents (weight: 75 g/m2, 20 lb) for one job.  
When you use the ADF:  
• Do not load documents smaller than 142 x 148 mm or larger  
than 216 x 356 mm.  
• Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents:  
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
- coated paper  
- onion skin or thin paper  
- wrinkled or creased paper  
- curled or rolled paper  
- torn paper  
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading documents.  
• Make sure any glue, ink or correction fluid on the paper is  
completely dry before loading documents.  
• Do not load documents containing different sizes or weights  
of paper.  
• Do not load booklet, pamphlet, transparencies or documents  
having other unusual characteristics.  
3.2  
COPYING  
     
Making a Copy  
1
2
3
Pull the document support all the way out. Fold out the  
extender, if necessary.  
Load the documents up to 20 pages face down into the ADF.  
3
Adjust the document guides to the document size.  
4
5
Customize the copy settings including number of copies,  
copy size, darkness and image by using the control panel  
copy job. For example, if you make 2 copies of 3 page  
documents, one complete 3 page document will print  
followed by the second complete document. see page 3.8  
To clear the settings, use the Clear/Stop button.  
Press Start.  
COPYING 3.3  
     
Setting Copy Options  
The buttons on the control panel let you make all the basic copy  
options; darkness, document type, copy size and number of  
copies. Set the following options for the current copy job before  
pressing Start to make copies.  
NOTE: If you press Clear/Stop while you set the copy options,  
all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be  
canceled and return to their default status. Or, they will  
automatically return to their default status after the machine  
completes the copy.  
Darkness  
If you have an original document containing faint markings and  
dark images, you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that  
is easier to read.  
To adjust the contrust, press Darkness  
. Each time you  
press the button, the LED labeled with the selected mode turns on.  
You can choose from the following darkness modes:  
Lighten: works well with dark print.  
Normal: works well with standard typed or printed  
documents.  
Darken: works well with light print or faint pencil markings.  
3.4  
COPYING  
   
Original Type  
The image setting is used to improve the copy quality by  
selecting the document for the current copy job.  
To select the document type, press Original Type  
time you press the button, the LED labeled with the selected  
mode turns on.  
. Each  
You can choose from the following image modes:  
Text: Use for documents containing mostly text.  
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.  
NOTE: When you copy a document containing color on the  
background, such as a newspaper or a catalog, you can get the  
background on your copy. If you want to reduce the background,  
change the Darken setting to Lighten and/or the original  
3
Type  
setting to Text.  
Number of Copies  
Using the No. of Copies button, you can select the number of  
copies from 1 to 99.  
1
2
Press No. of Copies.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the number you want  
appears on the display.  
Pressing and holding the buttons allows you to quickly  
increase and decreases in increments of 5.  
You can enter the value using the number keypad.  
3
Press Enter to save the selection.  
COPYING 3.5  
     
Reduced/Enlarged Copying  
Using the Reduce/Enlarge button, you can reduce or enlarge  
the size of a copied image from 50% to 150%.  
To select from the predefined copy sizes:  
1
Press Reduce/Enlarge.  
The default setting appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
2
3
Use Reduce/Enlarge or the scroll button ( or ) to find  
the size setting you want.  
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To fine-tune the size of copies:  
1
2
Press Reduce/Enlarge.  
Press Reduce/Enlarge or the scroll button ( or ) until  
“Custom:50-150%” displays on the bottom line. Press  
Enter.  
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the copy size you  
want appears on the display.  
Pressing and holding the buttons allows you to quickly  
increase and decreases in increments of 5.  
You can enter the value using the number keypad.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection.  
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at  
the bottom of your copy.  
3.6  
COPYING  
   
Changing the Default Settings  
Copy options, including darkness, image, copy size and number  
of copies, can be set to the most frequently used modes. When  
you copy a document, the default settings are used unless they  
are changed by using the corresponding buttons on the control  
panel.  
To create your own default settings:  
1
Press Menu on the control panel until “Copy Setup”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
The first menu item, “Default-Change, appears on the  
bottom line.  
3
2
3
4
5
Press Enter to access the menu item. The first setup  
option, “Darkness,appears on the bottom line.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the setup  
options.  
When the option you want to set appears, press Enter to  
access the option.  
Change the setting using the scroll button ( or ) or  
enter the value using the number keypad.  
6
7
8
Press Enter to save the selection.  
Repeat steps 3 through 6, as needed.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing Clear/Stop cancels  
the changed settings and restores their default status.  
COPYING 3.7  
   
Setting the Time Out Option  
You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the  
default copy settings, if you do not start copying after changing  
them on the control panel.  
1
Press Menu on the control panel until “Copy Setup”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Timeout” on  
the bottom line.  
3
4
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the status you want  
appears on the display.  
You can select from 15, 30, 60 and 180 (seconds).  
Selecting “Off” means that the machine does not restore  
the default settings until you press Start to start copying,  
or Clear/Stop to cancel.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Collation Copying  
The Collation copying feature is available only when you load  
documents in the ADF.  
1
2
Press Menu on the control panel until “Copy Setup”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button (or ) to display “Copy Collated”  
on the bottom line.  
3
4
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
If you are making multiple copies and want to collate them,  
press the scroll button (or ) to set Collated Copy to  
On  
and press Enter.  
1
1
1
2
3
2
2
1
3
2
3
3
œ
Collated Copy Off  
œ
Collated Copy On  
5
Press Start to begin copying.  
3.8  
COPYING  
       
FAXING  
4
This chapter gives you information about using your  
machine as a fax machine.  
This chapter includes:  
 
Sending a Fax  
Changing the Fax Setup options  
1
Press Menu until “Fax Setup” appears on the top line of the  
display.  
The first available menu item, “Ring To Answer,displays on  
the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the menu item you  
want on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the status or use the  
number keypad to enter the value for the option you have  
selected.  
4
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
If necessary, repeat steps 2 through 4.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
4.2  
FAXING  
     
Available Fax Setup Options  
You can use the following setup options for configuring the fax  
system:  
Option  
Description  
Ring To Answer  
You can specify the number of times the machine rings, 1 to  
7, before answering an incoming call.  
Darkness  
You can select the default darkness mode to fax your  
documents lighter or darker.  
Lighten works well with dark print.  
Normal works well with standard typed or printed  
documents.  
Darken works well with light print or faint pencil  
markings.  
Redial Term  
Your machine can automatically redial a remote fax machine  
when the line is busy. Intervals from 1 to 15 minutes can be  
entered.  
Redials  
You can specify the number of redial attempts, 0 to 13. If  
you enter  
0, the machine will not redial.  
4
MSG Confirm  
You can set your machine to print a report showing whether  
the transmission was successful, how many pages were  
sent, and more. The available options are On Off and On-  
,
Error, which prints only when a transmission is not  
successful.  
Auto Report  
A report with detailed information about the previous 50  
communications operations, including time and dates. The  
available options are On or Off  
.
Auto Reduction  
When receiving a document as long as or longer than the  
paper loaded in the paper tray, the machine can reduce the  
size of the document to fit the size of paper loaded in the  
machine. Select On if you want to automatically reduce an  
incoming page.  
With this feature set to Off, the machine cannot reduce the  
document to fit onto one page, the document is divided and  
printed in actual size on two or more pages.  
FAXING 4.3  
         
Option  
Discard Size  
Description  
When receiving a document as long as longer than the  
paper installed in your machine, you can set the machine to  
discard any excess at the bottom of the page. If the  
received page is outside the margin you set, it will print on  
two sheets of paper at the actual size.  
When the document is within the margin and the Auto  
Reduction feature is turned on, the machine reduces the  
document to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper and  
discard does not occur. If the Auto Reduction feature is  
turned off or fails, the data within the margin will be  
discarded. Settings range from 0 to 30 mm.  
Receive Code  
DRPD Mode  
The Receive Code allows you to initiate fax reception from  
an extension phone plugged into the EXT jack on the back  
of the machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear  
fax tones, enter the Receive Code. The Receive Code is  
preset to  
9
at the factory. Settings range from 0 to 9.  
You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection (DRPD) feature which enables a user to use a  
single telephone line to answer several different telephone  
numbers. In this menu, you can set the machine to  
recognize the ring patterns to answer. See page 4.13  
4.4  
FAXING  
 
1
Pull the document input support all the way out. Fold out  
the extender, if necessary.  
2
Load the documents up to 20 pages face down into the  
ADF and adjust the document guides to the document size.  
4
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document,  
3
Adjust the document resolution, referring to page 4.6.  
FAXING 4.5  
 
Adjusting the Document Resolution  
The default document settings produce good results when  
setting typical text based documents.  
However, if you send documents that are of a poor quality, or  
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a  
higher quality fax.  
1
2
Press Resolution on the control panel.  
By pressing Resolution or the scroll button ( or ), you  
can choose from Standard, Fine, Super Fine and Photo.  
The document types recommended for the resolution settings  
are described in the following table below:  
Mode  
Standard  
Fine  
Recommended for:  
Documents with normal-sized characters.  
Documents containing small characters or thin  
lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Super Fine  
Photo  
Documents containing extremely fine detail.  
Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote  
machine also supports the Super Fine  
resolution. See the notes below.  
Documents containing shades of gray or  
photographs.  
NOTES  
:
• For the memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available.  
The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
• When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the  
remote fax machine does not support the Super Fine resolution,  
the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode  
supported by the remote fax machine.  
4.6  
FAXING  
   
Sending a Fax Automatically  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Enter the remote fax phone number using the number  
keypad.  
You can use the one-touch keypad or speed or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see page 4.9.  
Press Start.  
The number is dialed and then the machine begins sending  
the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.  
NOTE: When you want to cancel the fax job, press Clear/Stop  
at any time while sending the fax.  
4
FAXING 4.7  
   
Sending a Fax Manually  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Press On Hook Dial or lift the handset(for America only).  
You hear a dial tone.  
Enter the remote fax machine’s fax number using the  
number keypad.  
You can use the one-touch keypad or speed or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see page 4.9.  
5
When you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote  
fax machine, press Start.  
NOTE: When you want to cancel the fax job, press Clear/Stop  
at any time while sending the fax.  
Redialing the Last Number  
To redial the last number you dialed:  
Press Redial/Pause.  
If a document is loaded in the ADF, the machine automatically  
begins to send.  
4.8  
FAXING  
         
Confirming Transmission  
When the last page of your document has been sent  
successfully, the machine beeps and returns to Standby Mode.  
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error  
message appears on the display. For a listing of error messages  
and their meanings, see page 8.8.  
If you receive an error message, press Clear/Stop to clear the  
message and try to send the document again.  
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report  
automatically each time sending a fax is completed. For further  
details, see the MSG Confirm item on page 4.3.  
Automatic Redialing  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer  
when you send a fax, the machine automatically redials the  
number every three minutes up to seven times by the factory  
default settings.  
4
When the display shows “[Retry Redial ?],press Enter to redial  
the number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing,  
press Clear/Stop.  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of  
redial attempts. See page 4.3.  
FAXING 4.9  
     
Receiving a Fax  
About Receiving Modes  
• In Fax mode, the machine answers an incoming fax call and  
immediately goes into the fax reception mode.  
• In Tel mode, you can receive a fax by picking up the  
handset(for America only) or pressing On Hook Dial (you  
can hear voice or fax tone from the remote machine) and  
then pressing Start on the control panel of your machine.  
You can also pick up the handset of the extension phone and  
then press the remote receive code(for America only); see  
• In Ans/Fax mode, the answering machine answers an  
incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the  
answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on  
the line, the call automatically switches to Fax mode.  
In DRPD mode, you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring  
Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. “Distinctive Ring” is a  
telephone company service which enables a user to use a single  
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.  
For further details. See page 4.13  
The current receiving mode displays when the machine is in  
Standby mode.  
When the memory is full, the receiving mode automatically  
switches to Tel.  
NOTES  
:
To use Ans/Fax mode, connect an answering machine to the EXT  
jack on the back of your machine. see page 1.16.  
• If you do not want other people to view your received  
documents, you can use Secure Receiving mode. In this mode,  
all of the received faxes are stored in the memory. For further  
details, see page 4.29.  
4.10  
FAXING  
   
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes  
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same  
whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes  
can only be printed on Letter-, A4- or Legal-sized plain paper.  
For details about loading paper and setting the paper size in the  
Receiving Automatically in Fax Mode  
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. If you have  
changed the receiving mode, take the following steps to receive  
faxes automatically:  
1
2
Press Receive Mode.  
Press and hold Receive Mode until “Fax” displays on the  
bottom line. You may have to repeat this action once or  
twice, depending on the mode you’re in.  
3
When you receive a fax, the machine answers the call on a  
specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax.  
4
To change the number of rings, see page 4.3.  
FAXING 4.11  
       
Receiving Automatically in Ans/Fax Mode  
For using this mode, you must attach an answering machine to  
the EXT jack on the back of your machine. See page 1.16.  
1
2
Press Receive Mode.  
Press and hold Receive Mode until “Ans/Fax” displays on  
the bottom line. You may have to repeat this action once or  
twice, depending on the mode you’re in.  
3
When you receive a call, the answering machine answers.  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine  
stores the message as it would normally. If your machine  
hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to  
receive the fax.  
NOTES  
:
• When you have set your machine to Ans/Fax mode and your  
answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is  
connected to the EXT jack, your machine automatically goes into  
Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.  
• If your answering machine has a “user-selectable ring counter,”  
set it to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
• If you are in Tel mode, which is receiving faxes manually, when  
the answering machine is connected to your machine, you must  
switch off the answering machine, or the outgoing message from  
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
Receiving Manually in Tel Mode  
You can answer calls using the handset(for America only) or the  
On Hook Dial button.  
1
2
Press Receive Mode.  
Press and hold Receive Mode until “Tel” displays on the  
bottom line. You may have to repeat this action once or  
twice, depending on the mode you’re in.  
3
4
When you receive a fax call, pick up the handset(for  
America only) or press On Hook Dial.  
You can hear a fax tone or voice from the remote machine.  
Press Start to receive the fax.  
The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to Standby  
Mode when the reception is completed.  
4.12  
FAXING  
       
Receiving Manually Using Remote  
Receive Start Code  
You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the  
extension telephone without going to the fax machine.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax  
tones, press the keys  
9
on the extension telephone. The  
machine receives the document.  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax  
tone from the remote machine, try pressing  
9
once again.  
9
is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first  
and the last asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle  
number to whatever you choose. For details about changing the  
code, see page 4.4.  
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode  
“Distinctive Ring” is a telephone company service which enables  
a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different  
telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call  
you on is identified by different ringing patterns, which consist  
of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds. This  
feature is often used by answering services who answer  
4
telephones for many different clients and need to know which  
number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.  
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature, your fax  
machine can “learn” the ring pattern you designate to be  
answered by the FAX machine. Unless you change it, this ringing  
pattern will continue to be recognised and answered as a FAX  
call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the  
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the  
EXT. jack. You can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring  
Pattern Detection at any time.  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option,  
Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line  
by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection, you will need another telephone line at your location,  
or someone available to dial your FAX number from outside.  
FAXING 4.13  
   
To set up the DRPD mode:  
1
Press Menu until “Fax Setup” appears on the top line of the  
display.  
The first available menu item, “Receive Mode,displays on  
the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button (or ) until you see “DRPD Mode”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
When “Set” displays on the bottom line, press Enter.  
The LCD displays ‘[Waiting Ring].”  
4
5
Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not  
necessary to place the call from a fax machine.  
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call.  
The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
When the machine completes learning, the LCD displays  
“End DRPD [Setup].  
If the DRPD setup fails, “DRPD Ring Error” appears. Press  
Enter when “DRPD Mode” displays and retry from Step 3.  
6
To return to Standby Mode, press Clear/Stop.  
When the DRPD feature is set up, the DRPD option is available  
in the Receive Mode menu. To receive faxes in the DRPD mode,  
you need to set the menu to DRPD.  
NOTES  
:
• DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or  
connect the machine to another telephone line.  
• After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify  
that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call  
placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be  
sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or  
answering machine plugged into the EXT. jack.  
Receiving Faxes in the Memory  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive  
faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a  
fax while you are copying or printing, your machine stores  
incoming faxes in the memory. Then, as soon as you finish  
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.  
4.14  
FAXING  
   
Automatic Dialing  
One-touch Dialing  
The 20 one-touch buttons on the control panel lets you store  
frequently-used fax numbers and dial a number automatically  
with a touch of a button.  
Storing a Number for One-touch Dialing  
1
Press and hold one of the one-touch dial buttons for about  
2 seconds.  
The display asks you to enter the fax number. T” signifies  
that you are assigning a one-touch dial button.  
If a number is already stored in the location you chose, the  
display shows the number to allow you to change it. To start  
over with another one-touch button, press Clear/Stop.  
2
3
Enter the number you want to store using the number  
keypad and press Enter.  
4
To insert a pause between numbers, press Redial/Pause.  
A symbol “-” appears on the display.  
If you make a mistake while entering a number, press the  
¤
button and re-enter the correct number.  
To assign a name to the number, enter the name you want.  
For details about entering characters, see page 1.30.  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
4
5
Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
To store more numbers, press a one-touch button and  
repeat steps 2 through 4.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
FAXING 4.15  
           
Sending a Fax using a One-touch Number  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Press the one-touch button where you stored a number.  
The document scans into the memory.  
The machine dials the fax number stored in the one-touch  
dial location and the document is sent when the remote fax  
machine answers.  
Speed Dialing  
You can store up to 80 frequently-dialed numbers in one or two-  
digit speed dial locations (0-79).  
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter.  
3
4
Press Enter when “Speed Dials” appears on the display.  
The display prompts you to enter a location number,  
showing the first available number.  
Enter a one or two-digit speed dial number between 0 and  
79, using the number keypad or scroll button ( or ) and  
press Enter.  
If a number is already stored in the location you chose, the  
display shows the number to allow you to change it. To start  
over with another speed-dial number, press Upper Level.  
4.16  
FAXING  
           
5
6
Enter the number you want to store using the number  
keypad and press Enter.  
To insert a pause between numbers, press Redial/Pause.  
A symbol “-” appears on the display.  
To assign a name to the number, enter the name you want.  
For details about entering characters, see page 1.30.  
OR  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
7
8
Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 4 through 7.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Sending a Fax using a Speed Number  
1
Feed the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
4
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Enter the speed dial number.  
• For a one-digit speed dial number, press and hold the  
appropriate digit button.  
• For a two-digit speed dial number, press the first digit  
button and hold the last digit button.  
The corresponding entry’s name briefly displays.  
The document scans into the memory.  
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is  
automatically dialed. The document is sent when the  
remote fax machine answers.  
FAXING 4.17  
   
Group Dialing  
If you frequently send the same document to several  
destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and  
set them under a one or two-digit group dial location. This  
enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the same  
document to all the destinations in the group.  
Setting a Group Dial Number  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Group Dials” on  
the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press Enter when “New” displays on the bottom line.  
The display prompts you to enter a location number,  
showing the first available number.  
5
6
Enter a group number between 0 and 79 using the number  
keypad or scroll button ( or ) and press Enter.  
Press a one-touch dial button, or enter a one or two-digit  
speed number you want to include in the group and press  
Enter.  
7
8
9
When the display confirms the number to be added to the  
group, press Enter.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter other one-touch dial or speed  
dial numbers into the group.  
Press Upper Level when you have entered all of the  
numbers. The display prompts you to enter a group ID.  
4.18  
FAXING  
       
10To assign a name to the group, enter the name.  
OR  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
11 Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
12 If you want to assign another group, press Enter and  
repeat from step 5.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number in another  
group dial number.  
Editing Group Dial Numbers  
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected  
group or add a new number to the selected group.  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
4
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Group Dials” on  
the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Edit” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
5
6
Enter the group number you want to edit and press Enter.  
Press a one-touch dial button to enter a speed dial number  
you want to add or delete.  
7
When you enter the specific number in the group, the  
display shows “Delete?.”  
When you enter a new number, the display shows “Add?.”  
FAXING 4.19  
   
8
9
Press Enter to add or delete the number.  
To change the group name, press Upper Level.  
10 Enter a new group name and press Enter.  
11 If you want to edit another group, press Enter and repeat  
from step 5.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing  
(Multi-address Transmission)  
You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed  
transmissions.  
Follow the procedure of the operation (Broadcasting  
transmission; see page 4.22, Delayed transmission; see  
page 4.23, Prioritytransmissionpage 4.25, DelayedRXPolling  
transmissionpage 4.26). When you come to a step in which the  
display asks you to enter the remote fax number:  
• For a one-digit group number, press and hold the appropriate  
digit button.  
• For a two-digit group number, press the first digit button and  
hold the last digit button.  
You can use only one group number for one operation. Then  
continue the procedure to complete the operation.  
Your machine automatically scans the document loaded in the  
ADF and then dials each of the numbers included in the group.  
Searching for a Number in the Memory  
There are two ways to search for a number in the memory. You  
can either scan from A to Z sequentially, or you can search using  
the first letter of the name associated with the number.  
4.20  
FAXING  
       
Searching Sequentially through the Memory  
1
2
3
Press Phone Book.  
Press Enter when “Search&Dial” appears on the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the  
memory until the name and number you want to dial  
display. You can search upwards or downwards through the  
entire memory in alphabetical order, from A to Z.  
While searching through the machine’s memory, you can  
see that each entry is preceded by one of three letters; “T”  
for one-touch dial, “S” for speed dial or “G” for group dial  
number. These letters tell you how the number is stored.  
4
When the name and/or the number you want displays,  
press Start or Enter to dial.  
Searching with a Particular First Letter  
1
2
3
Press Phone Book.  
Press Enter when “Search&Dial” appears on the display.  
Press the button labeled with the letter you want to search  
for. A name beginning with the letter displays.  
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,press  
the 6 button, which is labeled with “MNO.”  
4
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the next name.  
When the name and/or the number you want displays,  
press Start or Enter to dial.  
Printing a Phone Book List  
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Phone  
Book list.  
1
2
Press Phone Book.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) until  
“Print” appears on the bottom line and press Enter.  
A list showing your one-touch dial, speed dial and group dial  
entries prints out.  
FAXING 4.21  
         
Advanced Fax Functions  
Sending Broadcasting Faxes  
Using the Broadcasting button on the control panel, you can  
use the broadcasting fax feature, which allows you to send a  
document to multiple locations. Documents are automatically  
stored in the memory and sent to a remote station. After  
transmission, the documents are automatically erased from the  
memory.  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Press Broadcasting on the control panel.  
Enter the number of the remote machine using the number  
keypad.  
You can use one-touch keypad or speed dial or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see  
5
Press Enter to confirm the number. The display asks you to  
enter another fax number to send the document.  
NOTE: The Another No. prompt does not appear if you have  
added numbers for another broadcasting or delay fax job. You  
must wait until the job is completed.  
6
To enter more fax numbers, press 1 to select “Yes” and  
repeat steps 4 and 5. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Note that you cannot use group dial numbers for another  
fax number.  
4.22  
FAXING  
     
7
When you finish entering fax numbers, press 2 to select  
“No” at a Another No. prompt.  
The document is scanned into the memory before  
transmission. The display shows the memory capacity and  
the number of pages being stored in the memory.  
The machine begins sending the document in order of the  
numbers you entered.  
Sending a Delayed Fax  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you  
will not be present.  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display. The first available menu item, “DelayFax,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
4
4
5
Press Enter.  
Enter the number of the remote machine using the number  
keypad.  
You can use one-touch keypad or speed dial or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see  
6
Press Enter to confirm the number on the display. The  
display asks you to enter another fax number to send the  
document.  
NOTE: The Another No. prompt does not appear if you have  
added numbers for another broadcasting or delay fax job. You  
must wait until the job is completed.  
FAXING 4.23  
   
7
To enter more fax numbers, press 1 to select “Yes” and  
repeat steps 4 and 5. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Note that you cannot use group dial numbers for another  
fax number.  
8
9
When you finish entering fax numbers, press 2 to select  
“No at a Another No. prompt.  
The display asks you to enter a name.  
To assign a name to the transmission, enter the name. If  
not, skip this step.  
For details on how to enter the name using the number  
keypad, see page 1.30.  
10 Press Enter.  
The display shows the current time and asks you to enter  
the starting time when the fax is to be sent.  
11 Enter the time using the number keypad.  
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the  
document will be sent at that time on the following day.  
12 Press Enter when the starting time displays correctly.  
The document is scanned into the memory before  
transmission. The display shows the memory capacity and  
the number of pages being stored in the memory.  
The machine returns to Standby mode. The display reminds you  
that you are in Standby mode and that a delayed fax is set.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the delayed transmission, see  
4.24  
FAXING  
Sending a Priority Fax  
Using the Priority Fax feature, a high priority document can be  
sent ahead of reserved operations. The document is scanned  
into the memory and transmitted when the current operation is  
finished. In addition, the priority transmission interrupts a  
broadcast operation between stations (i.e., when the  
transmission to station A ends, before transmission to station B  
begins) or between redial attempts.  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
5
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Priority Fax” on  
the bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the number of the remote machine using the number  
keypad.  
4
To enter the number, you can use one-touch keypad or  
speed dial or group dial numbers. For details, see page 4.15.  
6
7
Press Enter to confirm the number. The display asks you to  
enter a name.  
To assign a name to the transmission, enter the name. If  
not, skip this step.  
For details on how to enter a name using the number  
keypad, see page 1.30.  
8
Press Enter.  
The document is scanned into the memory before  
transmission. The display shows the memory capacity and  
the number of pages being stored in the memory.  
The machine shows the number being dialed and begins  
sending the document.  
FAXING 4.25  
   
Polling a Remote Machine  
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send  
a document. This is useful when the person with the original  
document to be sent is not in the office. The person who wants  
to receive the document calls the machine holding it and  
requests that the document be sent. In other words, it “polls”  
the machine holding the original document.  
You can set the machine to automatically receive documents  
from the unattended remote fax machine at any time. This  
feature permits unattended polling in the evening hours when  
telephone rates are lower.  
NOTE: The machine must be ready for polling.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Delay Rx Poll”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the number of the remote machine to be polled using  
the number keypad.  
To enter the number, you can use a one-touch keypad or  
speed dial number. For details, see page 4.15.  
4
Press Enter to confirm the number on the display. The  
display asks you to enter another fax number.  
NOTE: The Another No. prompt does not appear if you have  
added numbers for another broadcasting or delay fax job. You  
must wait until the job is completed.  
5
To enter more fax numbers, press 1 to select “Yes” and  
repeat steps 4 and 5. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Note that you cannot use group dial numbers for another  
fax number.  
6
7
When you finish entering fax numbers, press 2 to select  
“No” at a Another No. prompt.  
Enter the time using the number keypad.  
4.26  
FAXING  
     
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, your  
machine will poll at that time on the following day.  
8
9
When the remote machine is secured with a 4-digit poll  
code, enter the correct code and press Enter.  
If not, press Enter to accept “0000” which represents no  
code, or enter 0000.  
Press Enter when the starting time displays correctly.  
At the specified time, the machine will dial the numbers in  
the order you entered and receive documents from the  
remote machines.  
Adding Documents to a Scheduled Fax  
You can add documents to the delayed transmission previously  
reserved in your machine’s memory.  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
4
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Add Page” on  
the bottom line and press Enter.  
The display shows the last job reserved in the memory.  
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the fax job to  
which you want to add documents and press Enter.  
FAXING 4.27  
   
The machine automatically stores the documents in the  
memory, and the display shows the memory capacity and  
the number of pages.  
After storing, the machine displays the numbers of total  
pages and added pages and then returns to Standby mode.  
Canceling a Scheduled Fax  
1
2
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Cancel Job” and  
press Enter. The display shows the last job reserved in the  
memory.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the fax job  
you want to cancel, and press Enter.  
When the display confirms your selection, press 1 to select  
“Yes.” The selected job is canceled and the machine returns  
to Standby mode.  
To cancel your selection, press 2 to select “No.”  
4.28  
FAXING  
   
Additional Features  
Using Secure Receiving Mode  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being  
accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on Secure  
Receiving mode to restrict printing out all of the received faxes  
when the machine is unattended. In Secure Receiving mode, all  
of the incoming faxes go into the memory. When the mode turns  
off, any faxes stored are printed.  
To turn Secure Receiving mode on:  
1
2
3
4
Press Menu until “Advanced Fax” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Secure Receive”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “On” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
4
Enter a four-digit passcode you want to use and press  
Enter.  
NOTE: You can activate Secure Receiving mode without setting a  
passcode, but cannot protect your faxes.  
5
6
Re-enter the passcode to confirm it and press Enter.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
When a fax is received in Secure Receiving mode, your machine  
stores it into the memory and displays “Secure Receive” to let  
you know that there is a fax stored.  
FAXING 4.29  
       
To print received documents:  
1
2
3
Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 and 2  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Print” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the four-digit passcode and press Enter.  
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in the memory.  
To turn Secure Receiving mode off:  
1
2
3
Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 and 2  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Off” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the four-digit passcode and press Enter.  
The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all of the  
faxes stored in the memory.  
4
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
4.30  
FAXING  
Printing Reports  
Your machine can print reports containing useful information.  
The following reports are available:  
Phone Book List  
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the  
machine’s memory as speed dial and group dial numbers.  
You can print this Phone Book list using the Phone Book  
button; see page 4.21.  
Sent Fax Report  
This report shows information of the faxes you recently sent.  
Received Fax Report  
This report shows information of the faxes you recently  
received.  
System Data List  
4
This list shows the status of the user-selectable options. You may  
print this list to confirm your changes after changing any settings.  
Scheduled Job Information  
This list shows the document currently stored for Delayed faxes  
The list shows the starting time and type of operation.  
.
Message Confirmation  
This report shows the fax number, the number of pages, the  
elapsed time of the job, the communication mode, and the  
communication results.  
You can set up your machine to automatically print the message  
confirmation report after each fax job. See page 4.3.  
Junk Fax Number List  
This list shows up to 10 fax numbers specified as the junk fax  
numbers by using the Junk Fax Setup menu; see page 4.34.  
FAXING 4.31  
   
When the Junk Fax Barrier feature is turned on, incoming faxes  
from those numbers are blocked.  
This feature recognize the last 6 digits of the fax number set as  
a remote fax machine’s ID.  
Multi-communication Report  
This report is printed automatically after sending documents  
from more than one location.  
Power Failure Report  
This report is printed out automatically when power is restored  
after a power failure, if there occurs any data loss due to the  
power failure.  
NOTE: The lists you have set to print out automatically don’t print  
out when there is no paper loaded or a paper jam has occurred.  
Printing a Report  
1
Press Menu until “Reports” appears on the top line of the  
display. The first available menu item, “Phone Book”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the report or list  
you want to print on the bottom line.  
• Phone Book: Phone Book list  
• Sent Report: Sent fax report  
• RCV Report: Received fax report  
• System Data: System data list  
• Scheduled Jobs: Scheduled job information  
• MSG Confirm: Message confirmation  
• Junk Fax List: Junk fax number list  
3
Press Enter.  
The selected information prints out.  
4.32  
FAXING  
Using Advanced Fax Settings  
Your machine has various user-selectable setting options for  
sending or receiving faxes. These options are preset at the  
factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the  
options are currently set, print the System Data list. For details  
about printing the list, see page 4.31  
Changing Setting Options  
1
Press Menu until “Advanced Fax” appears on the top line of  
the display. The first available menu item, “Send Forward,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the desired  
menu item on the bottom line and press Enter.  
When the option you want appears on the display, choose a  
status by pressing the scroll button ( or ) or enter a  
value using the number keypad.  
4
5
Press Enter to save the selection.  
You can exit from Setup mode at any time by pressing  
Clear/Stop.  
4
FAXING 4.33  
     
Advanced Fax Setting Options  
Option  
Description  
Send Forward  
You can set the machine to always forward all of the  
outgoing faxes to a specified destination, in addition to the  
fax numbers you entered.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the number  
of the remote fax machine to which faxes are forwarded.  
RCV Forward  
You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to  
another fax number during a specified period of time.  
When a fax arrives at your machine, it is stored in the  
memory. Then, the machine dials the fax number that you  
have specified and sends the fax.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the fax  
number to which faxes are forwarded. Then, you can enter  
the starting time and/or the ending time. The Print Local  
Copy option allows you to set the machine to print the  
fax, if fax forwarding is completed without any error.  
Junk Fax Setup  
Using the Junk Fax Barrier feature, the system will not  
accept faxes sent from remote stations of which their  
numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers.  
This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.  
Select Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you  
a fax.  
Select On to turn the feature on. You can set up to 10  
fax numbers as junk fax numbers using the Set option.  
This feature recognize the last 6 digits of the fax number  
set as a remote fax machine’s ID. After storing numbers,  
you do not receive any faxes from the registered  
stations. To delete all the junk fax numbers, use the All  
Delete option.  
Secure Receive  
Prefix Dial No.  
You can keep your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people.  
You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This  
number dials before any automatic dial number is started.  
It is useful for accessing the PABX exchange.  
4.34  
FAXING  
   
Option  
Description  
Stamp RCV Name  
This option allows the machine to automatically print the  
page number, and the date and time of the reception at  
the bottom of each page of a received document.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on.  
ECM Mode (Error  
Correction Mode)  
Error Correction Mode helps with poor line quality and  
makes sure any fax you send are sent smoothly to any  
other ECM-equipped fax machine. If the line quality is  
poor, it takes more time to send a fax when you are using  
the ECM mode.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on.  
4
FAXING 4.35  
 
Using the Remote Control Panel  
(for MFP model only)  
Using the Remote Control Panel, you can create and edit Phone  
Book entries or update the firmware program of your machine  
on the desktop of your computer.  
When you install software, the Remote Control Panel program is  
automatically installed.  
For information about installing software, see page 1.20.  
To open the Remote Control Panel:  
1
2
3
Start your Windows.  
From the Start menu, select Programs.  
Select Type 1200 and then Remote Control Panel.  
The Remote Control Panel program opens.  
4
The Remote Control Panel window provides the two tabs;  
Phone Book and Firmware Update.  
To exit, click the Exit button at the bottom of each tab.  
For further details, click the Help button at the bottom of  
each tab.  
4.36  
FAXING  
     
The Phone Book Tab  
Click the Phone Book tab to create and edit Phone Book entries.  
Reads the Phone  
Book entries from  
the machine to the  
Remote Control  
Panel.  
Downloads the  
PhoneBookentries  
from the Remote  
Control Panel to  
the machine.  
Shows Phone Book  
entries  
Allows you to  
edit the selected  
Phone Book  
entry in a  
Allows you to set  
up group dial  
numbers. See  
below.  
separate Edit  
window.  
Deletes all Phone Book entries.  
Deletes the selected Phone Book entry.  
When you click Group Dial, the following window opens.  
4
Enter a name for  
the group.  
Shows the Phone  
Shows the numbers  
included in the group.  
To remove a number,  
select it and click  
Book entries you  
can include in the  
group. After  
selecting a number,  
click Add to move it  
to the Included  
numbers list.  
Remove  
.
Click to save the group dial number after  
adding or removing numbers for the group.  
FAXING 4.37  
The Firmware Update Tab  
Click the Firmware Update tab to update the firmware of your  
machine. This feature should be used by an authorized  
technician. Please consult with the purchase point.  
4.38  
FAXING  
Printing a Document in Windows  
The following procedure describes the general steps required for  
printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps for  
printing a document may vary depending on the application  
program you are using. Refer to your software application’s  
user’s guide for the exact printing procedure.  
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
Select Print from the File menu.  
The Print window opens. It may look slightly different  
depending on your application.  
You can select the basic print settings within the Print  
window. These settings include the number of copies and  
the print range.  
Make sure that your  
machine is selected.  
œ¤Windows 98  
3
4
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
machine, click Properties or Preferences in the  
application’s print window and go to step 4.  
If you see a Setup, Printer or Options button, click it  
instead. Then click Properties on the next screen.  
Now you see the Printer Driver Type 1200 Properties  
window, which allows you to access all of information you  
need when using your machine.  
5.2  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
     
The Layout tab first displays.  
The preview image  
shows the sample page  
with the settings you  
specified.  
5
If necessary, select the Orientation option.  
The Orientation option allows you to select the direction in  
which information is printed on a page.  
Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape prints across the length of the page,  
spreadsheet style.  
If you want to turn the page upside down, select 180 from  
the Rotate drop-down list.  
œ
¤Portrait  
œ
¤Landscape  
5
6
From the Paper tab, select the paper source, size and type.  
For further details, see page 5.7.  
If necessary, you can set the sequence for the pages to  
print from the Extra tab. Select the print order you want to  
use from the Print Order drop-down list.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.3  
       
Normal: Your machine prints from the first page to the  
last page.  
Reverse All Pages: Your machine prints from the last  
page to the first page.  
Print Odd Pages: Your machine prints only the odd  
pages of the document.  
Print Even Pages: Your machine prints only the even  
pages of the document.  
7
8
9
Click other tabs on the top of the Printer Driver Type 1200  
Properties window to access other features, if needed.  
When you finish setting the properties, click OK until the  
Print window displays.  
Click OK to start printing.  
The printer’s Properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Operating Instructions shows the  
Properties window on windows 98  
Notes:  
• Most Windows applications overrides the settings you specified  
in the printer driver. Change all of the print settings available in  
software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes permanent,  
make them in the Printers folder. Follow these steps:  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
2. For Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings and then  
Printers.  
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes.  
3. Select the Printer Driver Type 1200 printer.  
4. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and:  
• For Windows 95/98/Me, select Properties.  
• For Windows 2000/XP, select Printing Preferences.  
• For Windows NT 4.0, select Document Default.  
5. Change the settings on each tab and click OK.  
5.4  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
Canceling a Print Job  
There are two ways to cancel a print job:  
To stop a print job from the control panel:  
Press the Clear/Stop button.  
Your machine finishes printing the  
page that is moving through the  
machine and deletes the rest of the  
print job. Pressing the button cancels  
only the current job. If more than one  
print job is in the machine’s memory,  
you need to press the button once for  
each job.  
5
To stop a print job from the Printers folder:  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such  
as the Printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:  
1
2
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 9x/NT4.0/2000/Me, Select Settings and then  
Printers.  
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes.  
3
4
Double-click the Printer Driver Type 1200 icon.  
From the Document menu:  
For Windows 9x/Me, select Cancel Printing.  
For Windows NT4.0/2000/XP, select Cancel.  
œ¤Windows 98  
NOTE: You can access this window simply by double-clicking the  
printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.5  
   
Using a Favorite Setting  
The Favorites option, which is visible on each tab, allows you  
to save the current properties settings for future use.  
To save a Favorites item:  
1
2
Change the settings on each tab, as needed.  
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.  
3
Click Save.  
To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop-down list.  
To delete a favorite setting item, select it from the list and click  
Delete.  
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
selecting <Printer Default> from the list.  
Using Help  
Your machine has a help screen that can be activated using the  
Help button in the printer’s Properties window. The help screen  
gives detailed information about the printer features provided  
by the printer driver.  
You can also click  
in the upper right hand corner, and then  
click on any setting.  
5.6  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
       
Setting Paper Properties  
Use the following options for paper handling. See page 5.2 for  
more information about accessing printer’s Properties.  
Click the Paper tab to access many paper properties.  
1
5
2
3
4
Property  
Copies  
Description  
Copies allows you to choose the number of  
copies to be printed. You can enter up to 999.  
1
2
Size allows you to choose the size of the paper  
loaded in the tray.  
Size  
If the required size is not listed in the Size box,  
click Add Custom. When the Custom Page  
Size window appears, set the size and click Ok  
The setting appears on the list so that you can  
select it.  
.
Enter the custom  
name you want to  
use.  
Enter the paper  
size.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.7  
       
Property  
Source  
Description  
Make sure that Source is set to the  
corresponding paper tray.  
3
Use the Manual Feed source when printing to  
special material. You need to load one sheet at  
a time into the manual feeder. See page 2.8.  
If the paper source is set to Auto Select, the  
machine automatically picks up print material in  
the following order: the manual feeder and the  
paper tray.  
Make sure that Type is set to Printer  
Default. If you load a different type of print  
material, select the corresponding paper type.  
For more information about print materials, see  
4
Type  
If you use cotton paper, set the paper type to  
Thick for the best printing.  
To use recycled paper, which weighs from 75g/  
m2 to 90g/m2 (20lb to 24lb), or colored paper,  
select Color Paper.  
5.8  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
     
Setting Graphic Properties  
Use the following graphic options to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs. See page 5.2 for more information  
about accessing printer properties.  
Click the Graphics tab to display the properties shown below.  
1
2
5
3
Property  
Description  
You can select the printing resolution by  
choosing from 600 dpi (Normal) or 300  
dpi (Draft). The higher the setting, the  
sharper the printed characters and graphics.  
Higher settings may increase the time it takes  
to print a document.  
1
2
Resolution  
Selecting this option extends the life of your  
toner cartridge and reduces your cost per  
page without a significant reduction in the  
print quality.  
Toner Save  
On: Select this option to allow the  
machine to use less toner on each page.  
Off: When you do not need to save toner  
to print a document, select this option.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.9  
         
Property  
Description  
You can make advanced settings by clicking  
the Advanced Options button.  
3
Advanced  
Options  
Darkness  
Use this option to lighten or darken the  
image appearance in your print.  
Normal: This setting is for normal  
documents.  
Lighten: This setting is for bolder line  
widths or darker grayscale images.  
Dark: This setting is for finer line width,  
higher definition in graphics and lighter  
grayscale images.  
When the Darken Text option is checked, all  
text in your document is allowed to print  
darker than a normal document (Applicable  
only to DBCS1 Windows such as Chinese,  
Japanese and Korean).  
1 DBCS stands for Double Byte Character Set.  
5.10  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
Property  
Description  
3
Advanced  
Options  
(continued)  
True Type Options(for Win9x/Me only)  
This option determines what the driver tells  
the machine about how to image the text in  
your document. Select the appropriate  
setting according to the status of your  
document.  
Download as Bit Image: When this  
option is selected, the driver downloads  
the font data as bitmap images.  
Documents with complicated fonts, such as  
Korean or Chinese, or various types of  
fonts print faster in this setting.  
5
Print as Graphics: When this option is  
selected, the driver downloads any fonts as  
graphics. When printing documents with  
high graphic content and relatively few  
TrueType fonts, printing performance  
(speed) may be enhanced in this setting.  
Print All Text Black  
When the Print All Text Black option is  
checked, all text in your document prints in  
solid black, regardless of the color it appears  
on the screen. When it is not checked,  
colored text prints in shades of gray.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One  
Sheet of the Paper  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of  
paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages are  
smaller and arranged in the order you specified on the sheet.  
You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
1
3
2
4
1
2
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side  
from the Type drop-down list.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.11  
   
3
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (1,  
2, 4, 9 or 16) on the Pages per Side drop-down list.  
4
Select the page order on the Page Order drop-down list, if  
necessary.  
Left, Then  
Down  
Down, Then  
Left  
Down, Then  
Right  
Right, Then  
Down  
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  
page on the sheet.  
NOTE: Page Order and Print Page Border are enabled only  
when the number of pages per side is 2, 4, 9 or 16.  
5
6
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
5.12  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged  
Document  
You can scale your print job on a page.  
1
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Layout tab, select Reduce/Enlarge on the  
Type drop-down list.  
5
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
You can also click the œ¤or button.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.13  
   
Fitting Your Document to a Selected  
Paper Size  
You can scale your print job to any paper size regardless of the  
digital document size. This can be useful when you want to  
check the fine details on a small document.  
A
1
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Layout tab, select Fit to Page on the Type drop-  
down list.  
Select the correct size from the Target Page drop-down  
list.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source and type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
0.15 inches  
5.14  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
   
Printing Posters  
You can print a single-page document onto 4, 9 or 16 sheets of  
paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form  
one poster-sized document.  
1
2
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Layout tab, select Poster on the Type drop-  
down list.  
5
3
Configure the poster option:  
You can select the page layout from 2x2, 3x3 or 4x4. If  
you select 2x2, the image is automatically stretched to  
cover 4 physical pages.  
œ¤2 x 2  
œ¤3 x 3  
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier  
to reconstruct the resulting poster.  
0.15 inches  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.15  
     
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the  
poster by posting the sheets together.  
Using Watermarks  
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  
document. For example, you may want to have large gray letters  
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIALprinted diagonally across  
the first page or all of the pages of a document.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with your  
machine, and they can be modified or you can add new ones to  
the list.  
Using an Existing Watermark  
1
2
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
Click the Extras tab and select a watermark on the  
Watermark drop-down list. It appears in the preview  
image window.  
Preview  
image  
3
Click Ok and start printing.  
5.16  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
       
Creating a Watermark  
1
2
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Watermark  
section. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
5
3
4
Enter text message you want to print in the Watermark  
Message box.  
The message displays in the preview image window.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark  
prints on the first page only  
.
Select the watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style and size and gray scale  
level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of  
the watermark from the Message Angle section.  
5
6
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.  
When you finish creating, click Ok and start printing.  
To stop printing the watermark, select <No Watermark> on  
the Watermark drop-down list.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.17  
 
Editing a Watermark  
1
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer properties. See page 5.2.  
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Watermark  
section. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
Select the watermark you want to edit on the Current  
Watermarks list, to change the watermark message and  
the options. Refer to page 5.17.  
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.  
Click Ok.  
Deleting a Watermark  
1
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Extras tab, click Edit in the Watermark section.  
The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
Select the watermark you want to delete on the Current  
Watermarks list and click Delete.  
4
5
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.  
Click Ok.  
5.18  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
   
Using Overlays  
What is an Overlay?  
An overlay is text and/or images stored on the computer hard  
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on  
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using  
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the  
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you need only tell  
the machine to print the letterhead overlay on your document.  
Dear ABC  
5
Regards  
WORLD BEST  
Creating a New Page Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay  
containing your logo or image.  
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for  
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you  
wish them to appear when printed as an overlay. If needed,  
save the file for later use.  
WORLD BEST  
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Overlay section.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.19  
         
4
In the Edit Overlays window, click Create Overlay.  
5
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight  
characters in the File name box. Select the destination  
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).  
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.  
Click Ok or Yes to finish creating.  
The file is not printed out. Instead it is stored in your  
computer HDD disk.  
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the  
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay  
with a watermark.  
5.20  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
Using a Page Overlay  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with  
your document. To print an overlay with a document:  
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.  
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
3
4
Click the Extras tab.  
5
Select the overlay you want to print from the Overlay  
drop-down list box.  
5
When the overlay file you want doesn’t appear on the  
Overlay List, click Edit and Load Overlay, and select the  
overlay file.  
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  
external source, you can also load the file when you access  
this Load Overlay window.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.21  
 
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears on the  
Overlay List and is available for printing. Select the overlay  
from the Overlay List box.  
6
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When  
Printing. When this box is checked, a message window  
appears each time you submit a document for printing,  
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your  
document.  
Answering Yes to the window means that the selected  
overlay prints with your document. Answering No to the  
window cancels overlay printing.  
If this box is empty and an overlay has been selected, the  
overlay will be automatically printed with your document.  
7
Click OK or Yes until the printing starts.  
The overlay downloads with your print job and prints on  
your document.  
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the same  
as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
5.22  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
Deleting a Page Overlay  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
1
2
3
In the printer’s properties window, click the Extras tab.  
Click Edit in the Overlay section.  
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List  
box.  
5
4
5
6
Click Delete Overlay.  
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.23  
 
Setting Up the Locally Shared Printer  
You can connect the machine directly to a selected computer,  
which is called “host computer,” on the network. Your machine  
can be shared by other users on the network through a Windows  
9x, Me, 2000, XP or NT 4.0 network printer connection.  
NOTE:Whether the printer is locally connected or network-  
connected, you need to install the printer software on each  
computer that will print documents to the printer.  
In Windows 9x/Me  
Setting Up the Host Computer  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu, select Control Panel and  
double-click on the Network icon.  
3
4
Check the File and Print Sharing box and click OK.  
Click Start and select Printers from Settings. Double-  
click your printer icon.  
5
6
Select Properties in the Printer menu.  
Click the Sharing tab and check the Shared As box. Fill in  
the Share Name field and then click OK.  
Setting Up the Client Computer  
1
2
3
4
Right-click Start and select Explorer.  
Open your network folder in the left column.  
Right-click the shared name and select Capture Printer Port.  
Select the port you want, check the Reconnect at log on  
box and then click OK.  
5.24  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
       
5
6
7
8
From the Start menu, select Settings and then Printers.  
Double-click your printer icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Properties.  
From the Details tab, select the printer port and click OK.  
In Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP  
Setting Up the Host Computer  
5
1
2
Start Windows.  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000, from the Start menu, select  
Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP, from the Start menu, select Printers and  
Faxes.  
3
4
5
Double-click your printer icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Sharing.  
For Windows NT 4.0, check the Shared box.  
For Windows 2000, check the Shared As box.  
For Windows XP, check the Share this printer box.  
6
For Windows NT 4.0, fill in the Share Name field and click OK.  
For Windows 2000/XP, fill in the Shared Name field and click OK.  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY) 5.25  
 
Setting Up the Client Computer  
1
2
3
4
Right-click Start and select Explorer.  
Open your network folder in the left column.  
Click the shared name.  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000, from the Start menu, select  
Settings and Printers.  
For Windows XP, from the Start menu, select Printers and  
Faxes.  
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click your printer icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Properties.  
Press the Ports tab and click Add Port.  
Select Local Port and click New Port.  
Fill in the Enter a port name field and enter the shared  
name.  
10 Click OK and click Close.  
11 For Windows NT 4.0, click OK.  
For Windows 2000/XP, click Apply and click OK.  
5.26  
PRINTING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
SCANNING  
(for MFP model only)  
6
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and  
text into digital files on your computer. Then you can fax  
or e-mail the files, display them on your web site or use  
them to create projects that you can print software.  
This chapter includes:  
 
Scanning Basics  
Your machine offers a following way to begin scanning:  
• From TWAIN-compliant software: You can use other software  
including Adobe PhotoDeluxe and Adobe Photoshop.  
NOTES  
:
To scan with your machine, you must install the Type 1200  
Driver.  
• Scanning is done through the same LPT or USB port currently  
assigned for your printer port.  
Scanning Process with TWAIN-  
enabled Software  
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will  
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
PhotoDeluxe or Adobe Photoshop. The first time you scan with  
your machine, select it as your TWAIN source in the application  
you use.  
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:  
• Place your photograph or page in the ADF.  
• Open an application, such as PhotoDeluxe or Photoshop.  
• Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
• Scan and save your scanned image.  
You need to follow the program’s instructions for acquiring an  
image. Please refer to the operating instructions of the  
application.  
6.2  
SCANNING (FOR MFP MODEL ONLY)  
       
MAINTENANCE  
7
This chapter provides information for maintaining your  
machine and the toner cartridge.  
This chapter includes:  
 
Clearing the Memory  
You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s  
memory.  
1
2
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Clear  
Memory” on the bottom line and press Enter  
The first available menu item, “Clear All Mem.” displays on  
the bottom line.  
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the item you  
want to clear.  
• Clear All Mem.: Clears all of the data stored in the  
memory and resets all of your settings to the factory  
default.  
• Paper Setting: Restores all of the Paper Setting options to  
the factory default.  
• Copy Setup: Restores all of the Copy Setup options to the  
factory default.  
• Fax Setup: Restores all of the Fax Setup options to the  
factory default.  
• Fax Feature: Cancels all of the scheduled fax jobs in the  
machine’s memory.  
• Advanced Fax: Restores all of the Advanced Fax setting  
options to the factory default.  
• Sound/Volume: Resets the sound and volume settings to  
the factory default.  
• Machine Setup: Resets all of the system settings, such as  
the machine ID, date and time, display language and  
save modes, to the factory default.  
• Sent Report: Clears all of records of your faxes sent.  
• RCV Report: Clears all of records of your faxes received.  
• Phone Book: Clears the one-touch, speed and group dial  
numbers stored in the memory.  
4
5
Press Enter. The selected memory is cleared and the  
display asks you to continue clearing the next item.  
To clear another item, press Enter and repeat steps 3 and 4  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
7.2  
MAINTENANCE  
   
Adjusting Shading  
When the scan unit becomes dirty, it can alter the shading value.  
If your copy has black lines or is blurred, adjust the shading  
setting.  
1
2
Load a sheet of white paper into the ADF.  
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Adjust Shading ”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or  
) to select “On” and press Enter.  
Your machine picks up the paper and adjusts the shading value.  
Cleaning Your Machine  
To maintain the print quality, follow the cleaning procedures  
below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print quality  
problems occur.  
NOTES  
:
• While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to touch  
the transfer roller, located underneath the toner cartridge. Oil  
from your fingers can cause print quality problems.  
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with surfactants containing  
large amounts of alcohol, solvent or other strong substances can  
discolor or crack the cabinet.  
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and  
aerosols. A fire or an electric shock might occur.  
7
Cleaning the Outside  
Clean the cabinet of the machine with a soft lint-free cloth. You  
can dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to  
be let any water drip onto the machine or inside of it.  
MAINTENANCE 7.3  
       
Cleaning the Inside  
During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can  
accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print  
quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning  
the inside of the machine clears or reduces these problems.  
1
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for  
the machine to cool down.  
2
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out,  
lightly pushing it down.  
3
With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled  
toner from the toner cartridge area and the toner cartridge  
cavity.  
NOTE: To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to  
light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if  
necessary. Do not touch the black transfer roller inside the machine.  
4
5
Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the cover.  
Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.  
7.4  
MAINTENANCE  
   
Cleaning the Scan Unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible  
copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of  
each day and during the day, as needed.  
1
2
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
Open the control panel by gripping its bottom and pulling it  
upward.  
3
Disassemble the white roller as follows:  
The right end of the white roller has a plastic bushing that  
is snapped shut with small tab on it. Pull the bushing  
slightly inward, then rotate the bushing until it reach a slot  
(). Then pull the roller upward ().  
7
MAINTENANCE 7.5  
   
4
5
Wipe the roller surface with a soft cloth dampened with water.  
Carefully wipe the scanning glass with a soft dry cloth.  
If the glass is very dirty, first wipe it with a slightly  
dampened cloth, and then with a dry cloth. Be very careful  
not to scratch the glass surface.  
6
7
Replace the roller by inserting the left end first followed by the  
right end, then rotating the bushing until it locks into place.  
Reconnect the support and the control panel and then close  
the control panel firmly until it clicks into place.  
7.6  
MAINTENANCE  
 
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge  
Toner Cartridge Storage  
To get the most from the toner cartridge, keep the following  
guidelines in mind:  
• Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until  
ready for use.  
• Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty  
does not cover damage caused by using a refilled  
cartridge.  
• Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your  
machine.  
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to  
light for more than a few minute.  
7
MAINTENANCE 7.7  
 
Redistributing Toner  
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life, white streaks  
or light print occurs. The LCD displays the warning message,  
“[Toner Low].” You can temporarily reestablish the print quality  
by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge.  
1
Open the front cover.  
2
Pull the toner cartridge out and gently roll the cartridge 5 or  
6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.  
NOTE: If the toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry  
cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets the toner into  
fabric.  
3
Reinstall the cartridge and close the front cover.  
7.8  
MAINTENANCE  
   
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
When the toner eventually runs out, only blank pages print  
when a print job is sent or when a fax is received. At this stage,  
the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. The display on the  
control panel shows the warning message, “[Toner Empty]” and  
the machine stops printing.  
NOTE: You can set the machine to ignore the “[Toner Empty]”  
message and continue printing. See page 7.11.  
1
2
Open the front cover.  
Lightly pushing the used cartridge down, pull it out.  
3
Unpack the new toner cartridge and gently roll it  
horizontally four or five times to distribute the toner evenly  
inside the cartridge.  
7
Save the box and the Plastic bag for shipping.  
MAINTENANCE 7.9  
     
4
Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks into place.  
5
Close the front cover.  
Setting the Notify Toner Option  
If you have set the Notify Toner menu option to “On, your  
machine automatically sends a fax to your service company or  
the dealer to notify them that your machine requires a new  
toner cartridge when the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.  
The fax number is preset by your dealer when you bought your  
machine.  
1
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
The first available menu item, “Clean Drum,displays on  
the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Notify Toner ”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to change the setting.  
Select “On” to enable this feature. Selecting “Off” disables  
this feature.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection.  
7.10  
MAINTENANCE  
   
Cleaning the Drum  
If there are streaks or spots on your print, the OPC drum of the  
cartridge may require cleaning.  
1
Before setting the cleaning procedure, make sure that  
paper is loaded in the machine.  
2
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
The first available menu item, “Clean Drum,displays on  
the bottom line.  
3
4
Press Enter.  
When the display asks you to confirm your selection, press Enter.  
The machine prints a cleaning page. Toner particles on the  
drum surface are affixed to the paper.  
5
If the problem remains, repeat steps 1 through 4.  
Ignoring the Toner Empty Message  
When the toner cartridge is empty, the machine shows a  
“[[Toner Empty]]” message and stops printing.  
You can set the machine to ignore the message when it displays  
and to continue printing the pages.  
1
2
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Ignore Toner”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter.  
3
Press the Scroll button ( or ) to select “On” or “Off.”  
Select “On” to ignore the Toner Empty message.  
7
Select “Off” to stop printing when the message appears.  
This is the default setting.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection.  
MAINTENANCE 7.11  
     
MEMO  
7.12  
MAINTENANCE  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
8
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you  
encounter an error.  
This chapter includes:  
 
Clearing Document Jams  
When a document jams while it passes through the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder), “[Document Jam]” appears on  
the display.  
Input Misfeed  
1
2
Remove the remaining documents from the ADF.  
Pull the jammed document gently out of the ADF.  
3
Load the documents back into the ADF.  
NOTE: To prevent document jams, do not use thick, thin or mixed  
documents.  
Exit Misfeed  
1
2
Remove the remaining documents from the ADF.  
Open the control panel by gripping its bottom and pulling it  
upward.  
8.2  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
       
3
Pull the document gently out of the ADF.  
4
Close the control panel. Then load the documents back into  
the ADF.  
Clearing Paper Jams  
When a paper jam occurs, “Paper Jam” appears on the display.  
Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.  
Message  
Location of Jam  
Go to  
[Paper Jam 0]  
Open/Close Door  
In the paper tray.  
In the fuser area or  
around the toner  
cartridge.  
[Paper Jam 1]  
Open/Close Door  
In the manual feeder  
In the paper exit area  
[Paper Jam 2]  
Check Inside  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently  
and slowly. Follow the steps on the next pages to clear the jam.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.3  
   
In the Paper Tray  
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper  
automatically exits the machine.  
If the paper does not exit, continue to step 2.  
Pull the paper tray open.  
2
3
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
If there is any resistance and the paper does not move  
when you pull or if you cannot see the paper in this area,  
skip to the fuser area around the toner cartridge. See  
4
5
Insert the paper tray into the machine until it snaps into  
place.  
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.  
8.4  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
 
In the Paper Exit Area  
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper  
automatically exits the machine.  
If the paper does not exit, continue to step 2.  
2
Gently pull the paper out of the front output tray. Skip to  
step 6.  
If there is any resistance and the paper does not move  
when you pull or if you cannot see the paper in the front  
output tray, continue to step 3.  
3
4
Open the rear cover.  
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
5
6
Close the rear cover.  
8
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.5  
 
In the Fuser Area or Around the Toner Cartridge  
WARNING: The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper  
from the machine.  
1
2
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out,  
lightly pushing it down.  
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
3
Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover.  
Printing automatically resumes.  
In the Manual Feeder  
” appears on the display when you try to print  
using the manual feeder and the machine does not detect paper,  
due to no paper or improper paper loading.  
The error message may also occur when the paper is not  
properly fed into the machine through the manual feeder. In that  
case, pull the paper out of the machine.  
8.6  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
   
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams  
By selecting the correct paper types, most paper jams can be avoided.  
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined in page 8.3.  
• Follow the procedures on page 1.13 when you load paper.  
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly.  
• Do not overload the paper tray. Ensure that the paper is  
below the paper capacity mark on the inside wall of the paper  
tray.  
• Do not remove the paper from the tray while your machine is  
printing.  
• Flex, fan and straighten the paper before loading.  
• Do not use creased, damp or highly curled paper.  
• Do not mix paper types in the paper tray.  
• Use only recommended print materials. See “Paper  
• Ensure that the print side of print materials is facing down in  
the paper tray and facing up in the manual feeder.  
• If paper jams frequently occur when you print on the A5-  
sized paper:  
- Load the paper into the tray as shown below.  
- Set the page orientation to Landscape in the printer’s  
Properties window. See page 5.3.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.7  
 
Clearing LCD Error Messages  
Messages appears on the display to indicate the control panel to  
indicate the machine’s status or errors. Refer to the following  
table to understand the message’s meaning and correct the  
problem, if necessary. Messages and their meanings are listed  
in alphabetical order.  
Display  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Your machine’s memory  
is full during the machine  
stores the document into  
the memory.  
To cancel the fax job, press the  
button to accept “Yes.”  
If you want to send the pages  
1
Cancel ?  
1:Yes 2:No  
were stored, press the  
2
button  
to accept “No.” You should send  
the remaining pages later when  
the memory is available.  
The machine has a  
communication problem.  
Ask the sender to try again.  
[Comm. Error]  
CRU Fuse Error  
The machine has a  
problem with recognizing  
the new toner cartridge.  
Please contact a service  
representative.  
The loaded document has  
jammed in the ADF  
(Automatic Document  
Feeder).  
Clear the document jam. See  
[Document Jam]  
[Door Open]  
The front or rear cover is  
not securely latched.  
Close the cover until it locks into  
place.  
You have tried to select a  
group location number  
where only a single  
location number can be  
used, such as when  
Just use a one-touch or speed  
dial number or dial a number  
manually using the number  
keypad.  
Group Not  
Available  
adding locations for a  
broadcasting operation.  
The remote machine does  
not have the requested  
feature, such as a  
Reconfirm the remote machine’s  
features.  
delayed transmission.  
It also occurs if the  
remote machine does not  
have enough memory  
space to complete the  
operation you are  
[Incompatible]  
attempting.  
8.8  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
     
Display  
[Jam 1] or  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
The toner cartridge is not  
installed.  
Install the toner cartridge. See  
[No Cartridge]  
The remote person did  
not answer or the line is  
already engaged.  
Try again after a few minutes.  
[Line Busy]  
Your machine cannot  
connect with the remote  
machine or has lost  
contact because of a  
problem with the phone  
line.  
Try again. If the problem  
persists, wait an hour or so for  
the line to clear and try again.  
[Line Error]  
Or, turn the ECM on. See  
You have attempted to  
set up a copy or fax  
operation with no  
Load a document and try again.  
Load Document  
document loaded.  
Low Heat Error  
There is a problem in the  
fuser unit.  
Unplug the power cord and plug  
it back in. If the problem  
persists, please contact a service  
representative.  
Open Heat Error  
[Over Heat]  
A problem has occurred  
in the LSU (Laser  
Scanning Unit).  
Unplug the power cord and plug  
it back in. If the problem  
persists, please call for service.  
[LSU Error]  
The memory is full.  
Delete unnecessary documents,  
retransmit after more memory  
becomes available or split the  
transmission into more than one  
operation.  
Memory Full  
[No Answer]  
The remote fax machine  
has not answered after  
several redial attempts.  
Try again. Make sure that the  
remote machine is operational.  
The one-touch or speed  
dial location you tried to  
use has no number  
assigned to it.  
Dial the number manually using  
the number keypad or assign the  
number. For storing a number,  
No. Not  
Assigned  
The paper tray has run  
out of paper.  
Load paper in the paper tray. See  
[No Paper]  
Add Paper  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.9  
Display  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
You are doing in the Add/ Check the display to see if there  
Cancel operation, but  
there is no jobs waiting.  
is any scheduled job. The display  
should indicate them in Standby  
mode, for example, Delay Fax.  
Operation  
Not Assigned  
Paper has jammed in the  
feeding area of the paper  
tray.  
[Paper Jam 0]  
Open/Close Door  
• Paper has jammed in  
the paper exit area.  
• A paper jam has  
occurred in the  
[Paper Jam 1]  
Open/Close Door  
manual feeder or the  
machine detects non-  
feeding from the  
manual feeder.  
Paper has jammed in the  
fuser area.  
[Paper Jam 2]  
Check Inside  
Power has turned off then  
on and the machine’s  
memory has not been  
saved.  
You need to start again the job  
which you were trying to do  
before the power failure.  
[Power Failure]  
[Retry Redial?]  
The machine is waiting  
for a specified time  
interval to redial a  
You can press Enter to  
immediately redial, or Clear/  
Stop to cancel the redial  
operation.  
previously busy station.  
The Clear/Stop button  
is pressed during a copy  
or fax operation.  
Try again.  
[Stop Pressed]  
[Toner Empty]  
The toner cartridge has  
run out. The machine  
stops printing.  
Replace with a new toner  
The toner cartridge is  
almost empty.  
Take out the toner cartridge and  
gently shake it. By doing this,  
you can temporarily reestablish  
printing operations.  
[Toner Low]  
8.10  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Solving Problems  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until  
the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, please call for  
service.  
Paper Feeding Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Paper is jammed during  
printing.  
• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the paper tray.  
The paper tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper,  
depending on the thickness of your paper.  
Paper sticks together.  
• Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. See  
• Remove paper from the paper tray and flex or fan the paper.  
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.  
• Different types of paper may be stacked in the paper tray.  
Load the paper of only one type, size and weight.  
Multiple sheets of paper  
do not feed.  
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam, clear the paper  
• Remove any obstructions inside the machine.  
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the  
tray and reload it correctly.  
Paper does not feed into  
the machine.  
• There is too much paper in the paper tray. Remove excess  
paper from the tray.  
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the  
specifications required by the machine. See “Paper  
• There is too much paper in the paper tray. Remove excess  
paper from the tray.  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that  
meets the specifications required by the machine. See  
special materials, use the manual feeder.  
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front  
cover and remove the debris.  
8
Transparencies stick  
together in the paper  
exit.  
Use only the transparencies specifically designed for a laser  
printer. Remove each transparency as it exits from the  
machine.  
Envelopes skew or fail  
to feed correctly.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the  
envelopes.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.11  
     
Faxing Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
• Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.  
The machine is not  
working, there is no  
display and the buttons  
are not working.  
• Check that the phone line is connected properly.  
No dial tone sounds.  
• Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by  
plugging in another phone.  
The numbers stored in  
the memory do not dial  
correctly.  
Make sure that the numbers are stored in the memory  
correctly. Print a Phone Book list, referring to page  
• Make sure that the document is not wrinkled and you are  
putting it in correctly. Check that the document is the  
right size, not too thick or thin.  
The document does not  
feed into the machine.  
• Make sure that the control panel is firmly closed.  
• Fax mode should be selected.  
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
• Check to see if the display shows “Memory Full.”  
Faxes are not received  
automatically.  
• Make sure that the document is loaded in the ADF.  
• “TX” should show up on the display.  
The machine does not  
send.  
• Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if  
it can receive your fax.  
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.  
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
• Check your machine by making a copy.  
• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner  
cartridge, referring to page 7.9.  
The incoming fax has  
blank spaces or is  
received with a poor-  
quality.  
Some of the words on a  
incoming fax are  
stretched.  
The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary  
document jam.  
There are lines on the  
documents you send.  
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it. See  
The machine dials a  
number, but a connection  
with another fax machine  
fails.  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper,  
or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other  
machine operator and ask her/him to clear out the  
problem.  
8.12  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
   
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Documents are not  
stored in the memory.  
There may not be enough memory to store the  
document. If the display shows a “Memory Full”  
message, delete any documents you no longer need  
from the memory and then restore the document.  
Blank areas appear at  
the bottom of each page  
or on other pages, with a  
small strip of text at the  
top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the  
Copying Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Copies are too light or too  
dark.  
Use the Darknen button to darken or lighten the  
background of the copies.  
• If defects are on the original document, press the  
Darknen button to lighten the background of your  
copies.  
Smears, lines, marks or  
spots appears on copies.  
• If no defects are on the original document, clean the  
Scan unit. See page 7.5.  
• Ensure that the original document is positioned  
correctly in the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder).  
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.  
Copy image is skewed.  
Blank copies print out.  
Ensure that the original document is face down in the  
ADF.  
• Replace the paper in the paper tray with paper from a  
new package.  
Image rubs off the copy  
easily.  
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the  
machine for the extended periods of time.  
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the paper  
tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply.  
Check/adjust the paper guides, if necessary.  
Frequent copy paper jams  
occurs.  
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight.  
75g/m2 (20 lb) bond paper is recommended.  
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper  
remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been  
cleared.  
8
• Your original documents may contain pictures, solids  
or heavy lines. For example, they may be forms,  
newsletters, books or other documents that use more  
toner.  
Fewer copies from the toner  
cartridge than expected  
prints out.  
• The machine may be turned frequently on and off.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.13  
 
Printing Quality Problems  
The dirty inside of the machine or improper paper loading may reduce the print  
quality. See the table below to clear the problem.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Light or faded  
print  
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page:  
• The toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily  
extend the toner cartridge life. See “Redistributing Toner” on  
page 7.8. If this does not improve the print quality, install a  
new toner cartridge.  
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example,  
the paper is too moist or too rough. See “Paper Specification”  
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too  
low or Toner Save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and  
turn Toner Save mode off. See page 5.9 respectively.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that  
the toner cartridge needs cleaning. See “Cleaning the Drum”  
• The surface of the scan unit may be dirty. Clean the scan unit.  
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the  
paper is too moist or too rough. See “Paper Specification” on  
• The transfer roller or paper path may be dirty. Clean the  
inside of your machine and the drum. See page 7.4 and  
Toner specs  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
Dropouts  
If generally rounded faded areas, occur randomly on the  
page:  
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the  
job.  
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has  
moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. See  
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing process can cause  
some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of  
paper.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Vertical repetitive  
defects on the next page.  
• If these steps do not correct the problems, contact a service  
representative.  
8.14  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
 
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The drum inside the toner cartridge has probably been  
scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
Gray background  
If the amount of background shading becomes  
unacceptable:  
• Change to a lighter weight pages. See “Paper Specification”  
• Check the machine’s environment; very dry (low humidity) or  
high humidity (higher than 80% RH) conditions can increase  
the amount of background shading.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
• Clean the inside of the machine. See page 7.4.  
Toner smear  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper Specification”  
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page  
at even intervals:  
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a repetitive mark  
occurs on the page, print a cleaning sheet several times to  
page 7.11. After the printout, if you still have the same  
problems, remove the toner cartridge and install a new  
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the  
defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will  
likely correct itself after a few more pages.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service  
representative.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.15  
 
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Background  
scatter  
Background scatter results from bits of toner distributed on  
the printed page.  
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different  
batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until  
necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the  
printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can  
cause problems.  
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a  
printed page, adjust the print resolution through your  
software application or the printer properties.  
A
• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow  
images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try a different  
Misformed  
characters  
• If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy  
effect, the scanner unit may need service. For service,  
contact a service representative.  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Page skew  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper Specification”  
• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly  
and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the  
paper stack.  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Curl or wave  
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and  
humidity can cause paper curl. See “Paper Specification” on  
Turn the stack of paper over in the paper tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
8.16  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper Specification”  
Wrinkles or  
creases  
Turn the stack of paper over in the paper tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine.  
• The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove  
the cartridge and reinsert.  
Black pages  
• The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
• The machine may require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
• Clean the inside of the machine. See page 7.4.  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper Specification”  
Loose toner  
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.  
Contact a service representative.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.17  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within the parts of  
characters that should be solid black:  
• If you are using transparencies, try another type of  
transparency. Due to the composition of the transparency,  
some character voids are normal.  
• You may be printing on the wrong surface on the paper.  
Remove the paper and turn it around.  
• The paper may not meet paper specifications. See “Paper  
A
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:  
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove and  
reinsert the cartridge.  
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner  
cartridge and install a new one. See “Replacing the Toner  
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.  
Contact a service representative.  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curl or paper does not feed into the  
printer:  
Turn the stack of paper over in the paper tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the paper tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
8.18  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Printing Problems(for MFP model only)  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine  
does not print.  
The machine is not  
receiving power.  
Check the power cord connections. Check  
the power switch and the power source.  
The machine is not  
selected as the default  
printer.  
Select Printer Driver Type 1200 as  
your default printer in your Windows.  
Check the machine for  
the following:  
After locating the problem, clear it.  
• Close the cover.  
• Clear the paper jam. See page 8.3.  
• Load paper. See page 1.13.  
• Install the toner cartridge. See  
• The front or rear  
cover is not closed.  
• Paper is jammed.  
• No paper is loaded.  
• The toner cartridge  
is not installed.  
If a printer system error occurs, contact  
your service representative.  
The connection cable  
between the computer  
and the machine is not  
connected properly.  
Disconnect the printer cable and  
reconnect it.  
The connection cable  
between the computer  
and the machine is  
defective.  
If possible, attach the cable to another  
computer that is working properly and  
print a document. You can also try using  
a different printer cable.  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer setting to  
make sure that the print job is sent to the  
correct port, for example, LPT1. If the  
computer has more than one port, make  
sure that the machine is attached to the  
correct one.  
The machine may be  
configured incorrectly.  
Check the printer properties to ensure  
that all of the print settings are correct.  
The printer driver may  
be incorrectly  
installed.  
Remove the printer driver and then  
respectively.  
The machine is  
malfunctioning.  
Check the display message on the control  
panel to see if the machine is indicating a  
system error.  
8
The machine  
selects print  
materials from  
the wrong  
The paper source  
selection in the printer  
properties may be  
incorrect.  
For many software applications, the  
paper source selection is found under the  
Paper tab within the printer properties.  
Select the correct paper source. See  
paper source.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.19  
 
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
A print job is  
extremely  
slow.  
The job may be very  
complex.  
Reduce the complexity of the page or try  
adjusting the print quality settings.  
The maximum print speed of your  
machine is 17 PPM for Letter-sized paper  
16 PPM for A4-sized paper.  
If you are using  
From the Start menu, choose Settings  
and Printers. Right-click the this  
machinge’s printer icon, choose  
Properties, click the Details tab, and  
then choose the Spool Settings button.  
Select the spool setting you want.  
Windows 9x/Me, the  
Spooling Setting may  
be set incorrectly.  
Half the page  
is blank.  
The page orientation  
setting may be  
incorrect.  
Change the page orientation in your  
The paper size and the  
paper size settings do  
not match.  
Ensure that the paper size in the printer  
driver settings matches the paper in the  
tray.  
The machine  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
The printer cable is  
loose or defective.  
Disconnect the printer cable and  
reconnect. Try a print job that you have  
already printed successfully. If possible,  
attach the cable and the machine to  
another computer and try a print job that  
you know works. Finally, try a new printer  
cable.  
incomplete.  
The wrong printer  
driver was selected.  
Check the application’s printer selection  
menu to ensure that your machine is  
selected.  
Software application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from another  
application.  
The operating system  
is malfunctioning.  
Exit Windows and reboot the computer.  
Turn the machine off and then back on  
again.  
8.20  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
Pages print,  
but are blank.  
The toner cartridge is  
defective or out of  
toner.  
Redistribute the toner. if necessary. See  
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.  
The file may have  
blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that it does not  
contain blank pages.  
Some parts, such as  
the controller or the  
board, may be  
Contact a service representative.  
defective.  
The  
illustrations  
print  
incorrectly in  
Adobe  
The setting in  
software application is  
wrong.  
Select Download as Bit Image in the  
Advanced Options window of the  
Graphic properties and print the  
document.  
Illustrator.  
An error occurs  
repeatedly  
when you are  
printing with  
the USB  
When the USB mode  
is set to “Fast,some  
PC users may  
experience poor USB  
communication.  
Change the USB mode to “Slow.” To do  
so, follow these steps:  
1. Press Menu on the control panel until  
“Machine Setup” appears on the top  
line of the display.  
connection.  
2. Press the scroll button ( or  
“USB Mode” appears on the bottom  
line, and press Enter  
) until  
.
3. Press the scroll button ( or  
select “Slow.”  
) to  
4. Press Enter to save the selection.  
5. Press Clear/Stop to return to  
Standby Mode.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.21  
   
Scanning Problems(for MFP model only)  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
• Make sure that you place the document to be scanned  
face down in the ADF.  
The scanner does not work.  
• There may not be enough available memory to hold  
the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan  
function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan  
resolution rate.  
• Check that the USB or parallel cable is connected  
properly.  
• Make sure that the USB or parallel cable is not  
defective. Switch the cable with a known good cable.  
If necessary, replace the cable.  
• If you are using a parallel cable, ensure that it is  
compliant with the IEEE 1284 standard.  
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly or the  
application you want to use to make certain that the  
scanner job is being sent to the correct port, for  
example, LPT1.  
• Check if the machine is printing received data. Scan  
the document after the current job is completed.  
The unit scans very slowly.  
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
• Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory required to  
analyze and reproduce the scanned image. Set your  
computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS  
setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details  
about how to set BIOS, refer to your computer  
operating instructions.  
• There may be a copying or printing job in progress.  
When the current job is complete, try the job again.  
Message appears on your  
computer screen:  
• “Device can't be set to the  
H/W mode you want.”  
• The selected port is currently being used. Restart your  
computer and try again.  
• “Port is being used by  
another program.”  
• “Port is Disabled.”  
• “Scanner is busy receiving  
or printing data. When the  
current job is completed,  
try again.”  
• The printer cable may be improperly connected or the  
power may be off. You must use a USB 1.1 compliant  
cable or a parallel cable that supports IEEE 1284 bi-  
directional communications.  
• The scanner driver is not installed or an operating  
environment is not set up properly.  
• Ensure that port is properly connected and power is  
on, and then restart your computer.  
• “Invalid handle.”  
• Do not use the parallel and the USB cables at the  
same time.  
• “Scanning has failed.”  
8.22  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
   
General Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Up to 20 sheets (weight: 75 g/m2, 20 lb)  
Automatic document  
feeder (ADF)  
Width: 142 to 216 mm (5.6 to 8.5 inches)  
Length: 148 to 356 mm (5.8 to 14 inches)  
ADF Document size  
Paper input capacity  
Paper output capacity  
Paper tray: 250 sheets (weight: 75 g/m2, 20 lb)  
Manual feeder: 1 sheet (weight: 60~163 g/m2, 16~43 lb)  
Front output tray: 150 sheets (face down)  
Rear output slot: 1 sheet (face up)  
Paper tray: Plain paper (60 ~ 90 g/m2, 16 ~ 24 lb)  
Manual feeder: Plain paper, Transparencies*, Labels*, Thick,  
Thin, Bond, Preprinted, Colored  
For MFP model only  
Paper type  
*
Card stock, Envelopes(60 ~ 163 g/m2, 16 ~ 43 lb)  
1-piece toner cartridge system  
Consumables  
100 ~ 127 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4.0 A  
220 ~ 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.5 A  
Power requirements  
Sleep mode: 10W(100 ~ 127 VAC) / 12W(220 ~ 240 VAC)  
Standby mode: 85 W(100 ~ 127 VAC) / 95 W(220 ~ 240 VAC)  
Average: 300 W  
Power consumption  
Noise  
Warm-up: 52 dB  
Standby mode: 39 dB  
Scanning: 52 dB  
Printing: 52 dB  
Warm-up Time  
35 seconds  
Temperature: 50 oF to 89 oF (10 oC to 32 oC)  
Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH  
Operating conditions  
LCD  
16 characters x 2 lines  
SET dimension (WxDxH)  
363.0 x 398.5 x 308.3 mm (without the handset)  
Net: 9.7Kg (including consumables)  
Weight  
A.2  
Gross: 11.7 Kg (including consumables, accessories and  
package)  
   
Item  
Description  
Paper: 2.7 Kg  
Plastic: 0.7 Kg  
Package Weight  
Facsimile Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Compatibility  
Applicable line  
Data coding  
ITU-T Group 3  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind PABX  
MH/MR/MMR (ECM Mode)  
Modem speed  
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/  
14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps with fall back  
Transmission speed  
Approx. 3 seconds/page  
* Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text  
data with ECM compression using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.  
Scan speed  
Paper Type  
Approx. 6 seconds/LTR (at standard fax resolution mode)  
Planin paper(60~90 g/m2, 16~24lb)  
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, B5  
Paper size  
Resolution  
Standard: 203 x 98 dpi  
Fine: 203 x 196 dpi  
Super Fine: 203 x 392 dpi  
Photo: 203 x 196 dpi  
User Memory  
Halftone  
2 MB  
256 levels  
Auto dialer  
One-touch dialing (up to 20 numbers)  
Speed dialing (up to 80 numbers)  
A
A.3  
 
Scanner and Copier Specifications  
Item  
Compatibility(for MFP model only)  
Scan method  
Description  
TWAIN standard  
CIS, Mono  
Scan resolution  
200 X 200 dpi (optical)  
Maximum: 15.7 inches (400 mm)  
Scan length  
Scan width  
Maximum: 8.5 inches (216 mm)  
Effective: 8.2 inches (208 mm)  
Mono bit depth  
Copy speed  
1 bit for Text mode  
8 bit for Gray mode  
Letter: 17 copies per minute  
A4: 16 copies per minute  
Copy resolution  
Zoom rate  
300 x 300 dpi  
50 ~ 150 %  
99 pages  
Multiple copies  
Halftone  
256 levels  
Printer Specifications(for MFP model only)  
Item  
Print method  
Print speed  
Description  
Laser Beam Printing  
Letter: 17 pages per minute  
A4: 16 pages per minute  
Paper size  
Paper tray: Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, A5, A6, B5  
Manual feeder: Letter, Legal, A4, Folio, Executive, A5, B5, A6, A6  
card, Post Card 4x6, Hagaki, Envelope 7-3/4, Envelope 9, Envelope  
10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C6, Envelope B5  
* Min.: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)  
Max.: 216 x 356 (8.5 x 14 in.)  
Print resolution  
Emulation  
600 x 600 dpi  
SPL (GDI)  
PC Interface  
Compatibility  
Memory  
Compatible with USB 2.0 Specifications and IEEE 1284 Parallel  
Windows 95/98/2000/NT 4.0/Me/XP  
4MB  
First printing time  
Standby mode: 12 seconds  
Power save mode: 47 seconds  
A.4  
       
Paper Specification  
Overview  
Your machine accepts a variety of print materials, such as cut-sheet paper, including  
up to 100% recycled fiber content paper, envelopes, *labels*, transparencies and  
custom-size paper. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain and moisture  
content, are important factors affecting the machine’s performance and the output  
quality. Paper that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this operating instructions  
can cause the following problems:  
• Poor print quality  
• Increased paper jams  
• Premature wear on the machine.  
*
for MFP model only  
NOTES  
:
• Some paper may meet all of the guidelines in this guide and still not produce  
satisfactory results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable  
temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which the manufacturer has  
no control.  
• Before purchasing large quantities of paper, insure the paper meets the requirements  
specified in this operating instructions.  
CAUTION: Using paper that does not meet these specifications may cause problems,  
requiring repairs. These repairs are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty or  
service agreements.  
Supported Sizes of Paper  
Size (mm/in.)  
Plain paper  
Weight  
Capacity  
Letter (215.9 x 279/8.5 x 11)  
A4 (210 x 297/8.27 x 11.69)  
Folio (215.9 x 330.2/8.5 x 13)  
Legal (215.9 x 355.6/8.5 x 14)  
Executive (184.2 x 266.7/7.25 x 10.5)  
B5(182 x 257/7.2 x 10)  
• 60 to 90 g/m2 bond  
(16 to 24 lb) for the  
paper tray  
• 60 to 163 g/m2 bond  
(16 to 43 lb) for the  
manual feeder  
• 250 sheets of 75 g/m2  
bond (20 lb) paper for  
the paper tray  
• 1 sheet of paper for  
the manual feeder  
A5 (148 x 210/5.83 x 8.27)  
A6 (105 x 148/4.13 x 5.88)  
A
A.5  
         
Size (mm/in.)  
Envelopes  
Weight  
Capacity  
No.9 (98.4 x 225.4/3.88 x 8.88)  
No.10 (104.8 x 241.3/4.13 x 9.5)  
DL (110 x 220/4.33 x 8.66)  
C5 (162 x 229/6.38 x 9.02)  
C6 (114 x 162/4.49 x 6.38)  
B5 (176 x 250/6.93 x 9.84)  
No.7 3/4 (98.4 x 190.5/3.88 x 7.5)  
1 sheet of paper for the  
manual feeder  
75 to 90 g/m2  
Labels  
Letter (215.9 x 279/8.5 x 11)  
A4 (210 x 297/8.27 x 11.69)  
120 to 150 g/m2  
138 to 146 g/m2  
Transparency films  
Letter (215.9 x 279/8.5 x 11)  
A4 (210 x 297/8.27 x 11.69)  
1 sheet of paper for the  
manual feeder  
Card stocks  
A6 card (105 x 148/4.13 x 5.88)  
Post Card (101.6 x 152.4/4 x 6)  
Hagaki (100 x 148/3.94 x 5.83)  
90 to 163 g/m2  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (Legal)  
60 to 120 g/m2 bond  
(16 to 32 lb)  
*for MFP model only  
NOTE  
:
• You may experience jams when using print materials with a length of less than 127  
mm (5 in.). For optimum performance, ensure that you are storing and handling the  
paper correctly. Please refer to “Paper Storage Environment” on page A.8.  
• Capacity may vary depending on print materials’ weight and thickness, and  
environmental conditions.  
Guidelines for Using Paper  
For the best result, use conventional 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. Ensure that the paper is  
of good quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles,  
voids, and curled or bent edges.  
If you are unsure of what type of paper you are loading, such as bond or recycled  
paper, check the label on the package.  
A.6  
 
The following problems may cause print quality deviations, jamming or even damage  
to the machine:  
Symptom  
Problem with Paper  
Solution  
Poor print quality or toner  
adhesion, problems with  
feeding  
Too moist, too rough, too  
smooth or embossed; faulty  
paper lot  
Try another kind of paper,  
between 100 ~ 400 Sheffield, 4  
~ 5 % moisture content.  
Dropout, jamming, curl  
Stored improperly  
Store paper flat in its moisture-  
proof wrapping.  
Increased gray background  
shading/machine wear  
Too heavy  
Use lighter paper, use the rear  
output slot.  
Excessive curl problems with Too moist, wrong grain  
• Use the rear output slot.  
• Use long-grain paper.  
feeding  
direction or short-grain  
construction  
Jamming, damage to  
machine  
Cutouts or perforations  
Do not use paper with cutouts or  
perforations.  
Problems with feeding  
Ragged edges  
Use good quality paper.  
NOTES  
:
• Do not use letterhead paper printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in  
some types of thermography.  
• Do not use raised or embossed letterhead.  
• The machine uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Insure that any  
colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with this fusing  
temperature (200 °C or 392 °F for 0.1 second).  
A
A.7  
Paper Specifications  
Category  
Acid Content  
Specifications  
5.5 pH or lower  
Caliper  
0.094 ~ 0.18 mm (3.0 ~ 7.0 mils)  
Flat within 5 mm (0.02 in.)  
Curl in Ream  
Cut Edge Conditions  
Fusing Compatibility  
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray.  
Must not scorch, melt, offset or release hazardous  
emissions when heated to 200 °C (392 °F) for 0.1  
second.  
Grain  
Long Grain  
Moisture Content  
Smoothness  
4 % ~ 6 % by weight  
100 ~ 400 Sheffield  
Paper Output Capacity  
Output Location  
Capacity  
150 sheets of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper  
1 sheet of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper  
Face-down output tray  
Face-up output slot  
Paper Storage Environment  
Paper storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.  
Ideally, the machine and paper storage environment should be at or near room  
temperature, and not too dry or humid. Remember that paper is hygroscopic; it  
absorbs and loses moisture rapidly.  
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to  
evaporate, while cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air  
conditioners remove most of the humidity from a room. As paper is opened and used,  
it loses moisture, causing streaks and smudging. Humid weather or water coolers can  
cause the humidity to increase in a room. As paper is opened and used it absorbs any  
excess moisture, causing light print and dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains  
moisture it can become distorted. This can cause paper jams.  
Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be used in a short time  
(about 3 months). Paper stored for long periods may experience heat and moisture  
A.8  
     
extremes, which can cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to  
large supplies of paper.  
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use.  
Opened packages of paper have more potential for environment damage, especially  
if they are not wrapped with a moisture-proof barrier.  
The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum  
performance. The required condition is 20 to 24 °C (68 to 75 °F), with a relative  
humidity of 45 % to 55 %. The following guidelines should be considered when  
evaluating the paper’s storage environment:  
• Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.  
• The air should not be too dry or too humid.  
• The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its  
moisture-proof wrapping. If the machine environment is subject to extremes,  
unwrap only the amount of paper to be used during the day’s operation to prevent  
unwanted moisture changes.  
Envelopes  
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only  
between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer.  
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When  
selecting envelopes, consider the following components:  
• Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90g/m2 (24lb) or  
jamming may occur.  
• Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6mm  
(0.25in.) curl, and should not contain air.  
• Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked or otherwise damaged.  
Temperature: You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and  
pressure of the machine.  
• Size: You should only use envelopes within the following size ranges  
NOTES  
:
• Use only the manual feeder to print envelopes.  
• You may experience some paper jams when using any media with a length less than  
140 mm (5.5 in.). This may be caused by paper that has been affected by  
environmental conditions. For optimum performance, make sure you are storing and  
handling the paper correctly. Please refer to “Paper Storage Environment” on  
A
A.9  
 
Envelopes with Double Side Seams  
Double side-seams construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope  
rather than diagonal seams. This style may be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure the  
seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as illustrated below.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Envelopes with Adhesive Strips or Flaps  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to  
seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the machine. The  
extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing or even jams and may even  
damage the fuser.  
Envelope Margins  
The following gives typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope.  
Type of Address  
Return address  
Minimum  
15 mm (0.6 in.)  
51 mm (2 in.)  
Maximum  
51 mm (2 in.)  
90 mm (3.5 in.)  
Delivery address  
NOTES  
:
• For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 in.) from the  
edges of the envelope.  
• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.  
Envelope Storage  
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be  
stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope  
may wrinkle during printing.  
A.10  
Labels(for MFP model only)  
CAUTIONS  
:
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels recommended for laser printers.  
To prevent serious jams, always use the manual feeder to print labels and always use  
the rear output tray.  
• Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once and never print on a partial  
sheet of labels.  
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:  
• Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 180°C (356°F), the  
machine’s fusing temperature.  
• Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can  
peel off sheets with spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.  
• Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13mm (5in.) of curl in  
any direction.  
• Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles or other indications of  
separation.  
Transparencies(for MFP model only)  
Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand 180°C (356°F), the  
machine’s fusing temperature.  
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies recommended for  
use in laser printers.  
A
A.11  
   
printer properties  
printing  
N
reduced or enlarged document  
O
one-touch dial  
problems, solve  
P
paper load  
paper size, set  
R
receiving a fax  
redialing  
reduced/enlarged  
paper type, set  
printer driver, install  
resolution  
H914-8650  
Safety Information  
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.  
Safety During Operation  
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:  
WARNING:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are  
not followed, could result in death or serious injury.  
CAUTION:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not  
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.  
WARNING:  
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension  
cord.  
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power  
cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.  
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not remove  
any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.  
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the  
cable) if any of the following occurs:  
•You spill something into the machine.  
•You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.  
•The external housing of your machine has been damaged.  
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when  
exposed to an open flame.  
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.  
• Dispose of the used toner bottle in accordance with the local regulations.  
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an  
electric shock might occur.  
ii  
   
CAUTION:  
• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the  
machine, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the machine.  
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the  
cable).  
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the machine.  
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner bottle out of the reach of children.  
• Be careful not to cut yourself on any sharp edges when you reach inside the product to  
remove misfed sheets of paper or masters.  
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended supply waste at  
household waste collection points. Disposal can take place at an authorized dealer.  
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label indicating the  
“hot surface”. Otherwise, an injury might occur.  
Power Supply  
The socket-outlet shall be in stalled near the product and shall be easily accessible.  
Ozone Safety  
This product generates ozone during operation Normally, the ozone level is safe for operators.  
.
If ozone odor may appear, ventilate the room.  
For Fax or Telephone  
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or  
laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Avoid using a telephone during an  
electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use a  
telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.  
Laser Safety:  
This equipment is considered a class 1 laser device. This equipment contains a 5 milliwatt, 760-800  
nanometer wavelength, AlGaAs laser diode. The following marking is attached on the back of the  
equipment.  
Caution:  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this  
Operating Instructions might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
iii  
Declaration of Conformity  
Notice to Users in EEA Countries  
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC  
of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.  
Notice to Users Accessing Analog PSTN in EEA Countries  
This product is designed to be able to access analog PSTN in all EEA countries. Local PSTN  
compatibility is dependent on software switch settings. Please contact your service  
representative if relocating this product to another country. In the event of problems, please  
contact your service representative in the first instance.  
FAX1130L/FAX1170L/F230/F250/LF120/LF125m: The CE declaration of Comformity is available on the  
Internet at URL :  
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc  
IF3030/IF3035 :The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL:  
http://jboard.danka.de/jboard/produkte/index.htmlo and selecting the product applicable.  
Positions of Labels and Hallmarks for  
WARNING and  
CAUTION Labels  
This machine has labels for  
WARNING and  
CAUTION at the positions shown below. For  
safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.  
*
*
*This label is stuck to hot surfaces. Be careful not to touch these areas.  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:  
means POWER ON.  
means POWER OFF.  
iv  
Control Panel Functions  
Use to store frequently-dialed fax number and  
dial them with a touch of the buttons.  
1
Scrolls through the options available for the  
selected menu item.  
Confirms the selection on the display.  
2
3
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
menus available.  
Returns you to the upper menu level.  
Displays the current status and prompts  
during an operation.  
1
 
Allows you to select the fax receiving mode.  
• Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax  
numbers using a one or two-digit speed dial  
or group number for automatic dialing and  
edit the stored numbers.  
• Allows you to print a Phone book list.  
4
F
Adjusts the resolution of the documents for  
the current fax job.  
A
X
Allows you to send a fax to multiple  
destinations.  
Engages the telephone line.  
Redials the last number in Standby mode or  
inserts a pause into a fax number in Edit  
mode.  
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric  
characters.  
5
Adjusts the brightness of the documents for  
the current copy job.  
*1This button is called “Darkness” in this manual.  
Selects the document type for the current  
copy job.  
6
C
O
P
Y
*2This button is called “Original Type” in this manual.  
Makes a copy smaller or larger than the  
original document.  
Selects the number of copies.  
Stops an operation at any time.  
In Standby mode, clears/stop the copy  
options, such as the darkness, the document  
type setting, the copy size and the number of  
copies.  
7
Starts a job.  
2
Changing the Display Language  
To change the language that displays on the display of the  
control panel, follow these steps:  
1
2
3
4
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Language” appears  
on the bottom line of the display.  
Press Enter. The current setting appears on the bottom  
line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the language you  
want appears on the display.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby Mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Setting the Date and Time  
The current date and time are shown on the display when your  
machine is on and ready to work. All of your faxes will have the  
date and time printed on them.  
NOTE: If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the  
correct time and date once the power is restored.  
1
2
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Date & Time”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
3
Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad.  
Month  
Day  
= 01 ~ 12  
= 01 ~ 31  
Year  
= requires all four digits  
Hour  
= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)  
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)  
Minute  
= 00 ~ 59  
NOTE: The date format may differ from each country.  
3
   
You can also use the scroll button ( or ) to move the  
cursor under the digit you want to correct and enter a new  
number.  
4
5
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator,  
pressing the  
to the indicator.  
or  
button immediately moves the cursor  
You can change the clock mode to 24-hour format (e.g.  
01:00 PM as 13:00).  
Press Enter when the time and date on the display is  
correct.  
When you enter a wrong number, the machine beeps and  
does not proceed to the next step. If this happens, just  
reenter the correct number.  
Printing a Report  
1
Press Menu until “Reports” appears on the top line of the  
display. The first available menu item, “Phone Book”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the report or list  
you want to print on the bottom line.  
Press Enter.  
The selected information prints out.  
4
 
Using Advanced Fax Settings  
Your machine has various user-selectable setting options for  
sending or receiving faxes. These options are preset at the  
factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the  
options are currently set, print the System Data list. For details  
about printing the list, see Operating Instruction.  
Changing Setting Options  
1
Press Menu until “Advanced Fax” appears on the top line of  
the display. The first available menu item, “Send Forward,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the desired  
menu item on the bottom line and press Enter.  
When the option you want appears on the display, choose a  
status by pressing the scroll button ( or ) or enter a  
value using the number keypad.  
4
5
Press Enter to save the selection.  
You can exit from Setup mode at any time by pressing  
Clear/Stop.  
Loading a Document  
1
Pull the document input support all the way out. Fold out  
the extender, if necessary.  
5
     
2
Load the documents up to 20 pages face down into the  
ADF and adjust the document guides to the document size.  
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document.  
3
Adjust the document resolution, referring to Operating  
Instruction.  
Sending a Fax Automatically  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
Operating Instruction.  
If you need to change the darkness, see Operating  
Instruction.  
3
4
Enter the remote fax phone number using the number  
keypad.  
You can use the one-touch keypad or speed or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see Operating  
Instruction.  
Press Start.  
The number is dialed and then the machine begins sending  
the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.  
NOTE: When you want to cancel the fax job, press Clear/Stop  
at any time while sending the fax.  
6
 
Confirming Transmission  
When the last page of your document has been sent  
successfully, the machine beeps and returns to Standby Mode.  
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error  
message appears on the display. For a listing of error messages  
and their meanings, see Operating Instruction.  
If you receive an error message, press Clear/Stop to clear the  
message and try to send the document again.  
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report  
automatically each time sending a fax is completed. For further  
details, see the MSG Confirm item Operating Instruction.  
Automatic Redialing  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer  
when you send a fax, the machine automatically redials the  
number every three minutes up to seven times by the factory  
default settings.  
When the display shows “[Retry Redial ?],press Enter to redial  
the number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing,  
press Clear/Stop.  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of  
redial attempts. See Operating Instruction.  
Redialing the Last Number  
To redial the last number you dialed:  
Press Redial/Pause.  
If a document is loaded in the ADF, the machine automatically  
begins to send.  
Reference:  
See Operating Instruction for installing printer and scanner software.  
7
     
Memo  
8
Operating Instructions  
LF 215 (H916)  
For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information  
in this manual before you use it.  
About the Operating Instructions  
Your machine comes with the References:  
This Operating Instructions provides information you need for setting up your machine  
and installing the supplied software. It also provides all of the detailed instructions for using  
your machine as a printer, a scanner and a copier and information for maintaining and  
troubleshooting the machine.  
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the  
company be liable for direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages as a result of  
handling or operating the machine.  
Copyright © 2004.  
• Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.  
• IBM and IBM PC are Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.  
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows 9x, Window Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0  
and Windows XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
TrueType is a trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or  
organizations.  
Safety Information  
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.  
Safety During Operation  
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:  
WARNING:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are  
not followed, could result in death or serious injury.  
CAUTION:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not  
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.  
WARNING:  
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an  
extension cord.  
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power  
cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.  
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not  
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.  
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not  
the cable) if any of the following occurs:  
•You spill something into the machine.  
•You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.  
•The external housing of your machine has been damaged.  
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when  
exposed to an open flame.  
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.  
• Dispose of the used toner bottle in accordance with the local regulations.  
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire  
or an electric shock might occur.  
ii  
CAUTION:  
• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving  
the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the  
machine.  
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the  
cable).  
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the  
machine.  
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner bottle out of the reach of children.  
• Be careful not to cut yourself on any sharp edges when you reach inside the product to  
remove misfed sheets of paper or masters.  
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended supply waste at  
household waste collection points. Disposal can take place at an authorized dealer.  
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label  
indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise, an injury might occur.  
Power Supply  
The socket-outlet shall be in stalled near the product and shall be easily accessible.  
Ozone Safety  
This product generates ozone during operation.  
Normally, the ozone level is safe for operators. If ozone odor may appear, ventilate the room.  
For Fax or Telephone  
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or  
laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Avoid using a telephone during an  
electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use a  
telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.  
Laser Safety:  
This equipment is considered a class 1 laser device. This equipment contains a 5 milliwatt, 760-800  
nanometer wavelength, AlGaAs laser diode. The following marking is attached on the back of the  
equipment.  
Caution:  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in  
this Operating Instructions might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
For North America  
Laser Safety:  
This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR subchapter J for class 1 laser products.  
This equipment contains a 5 milliwatt, 760–800 nanometer wavelength, AlGaAs laser diode.  
Caution:  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this  
Operating Instructions might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
iii  
Declaration of Conformity  
Notice to Users in EEA Countries  
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC  
of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.  
Notice to Users Accessing Analog PSTN in EEA Countries  
This product is designed to be able to access analog PSTN in all EEA countries. Local PSTN  
compatibility is dependent on software switch settings. Please contact your service  
representative if relocating this product to another country. In the event of problems, please  
contact your service representative in the first instance.  
FAX2210L/LF215m : The CE declaration of Comformity is available on the Internet at URL :  
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc  
IF3050: The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL:  
http://jboard.danka.de/jboard/produkte/index.htmlo and selecting the product applicable.  
iv  
Positions of Labels and Hallmarks for  
WARNING and  
CAUTION Labels  
This machine has labels for  
WARNING and  
CAUTION at the positions shown below. For  
safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.  
*
*
*This label is stuck to hot surfaces. Be careful not to touch these areas.  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:  
means POWER ON.  
means POWER OFF.  
v
NOTICE  
Note to users in the United States of America  
Notice:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,  
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with  
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is  
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning  
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more  
of the following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.  
Caution  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in USA only).  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use  
a computer or other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message  
unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each  
transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent  
and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the  
message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other  
entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any  
other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)  
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the  
following steps: Follow the FAX HEADER programming procedure in the Programming  
chapter of the operating instructions to enter the business identification and telephone  
number of the terminal or business. This information is transmitted with your document  
by the FAX HEADER feature. In addition to the information, be sure to program the date  
and time into your machine.  
vi  
USA  
FCC Requirements  
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and requirements adopted by the  
ACTA. On the cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information,  
a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. If requested, this number must  
be provided to the telephone company.  
2. This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.  
3. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone  
network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted  
by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product.  
It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See  
installation instructions for detail.  
4. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a  
telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing  
in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not  
exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a  
line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for  
this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX.  
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of  
0.3).  
5. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will  
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if  
advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon  
as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you  
believe it is necessary.  
6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or  
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the  
telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary  
modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.  
7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please  
contact RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX. If the equipment  
is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you  
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.  
8. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error  
indication), refer to the solving problems section in this manual.  
9. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility  
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.  
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO  
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:  
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before  
hanging up.  
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late  
evenings.  
CANADA  
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to  
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any  
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the  
devices does not exceed five.  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.  
Note:  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
vii  
Differences Between British and American English  
British English  
(Re)dialling  
Colour  
American English  
(Re)dialing  
Color  
Emphasise  
Recognise  
Organise  
Authorise  
Cancelling  
Customise  
Socket  
Emphasize  
Recognize  
Organize  
Authorize  
Canceling  
Customize  
Jack  
Labelling  
Labeling  
WARNING  
• Do not disassemble the machine as it may give you an electric shock.  
• If you print large amount of copies, the surface of the output tray may become  
hot. Be careful not to touch the surface, especially for children.  
viii  
CONTENTS  
ix  
Setting the Paper Type and Size for the  
Manual Feeder ............................................... 2.10  
x
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing  
xi  
xii  
xiii  
GETTING STARTED  
1
Thank you for purchasing this multifunctional product.  
Your machine provides you with printing, copying,  
scanning, and faxing functions!  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for  
setting up your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Setting Up Your Machine  
Unpacking  
Remove the machine and all accessories from the packing carton.  
Make sure that the machine has been packed with the following  
items. If there is a missing item, contact the retailer where you  
bought the machine:  
AC Power Cord*  
Starter Toner Cartridge  
Telephone Line Cord*  
CD-ROM**  
Quick Install Guide  
Quick Guide  
Document Output Support  
USB Cable  
(for America only)  
1.2  
GETTING STARTED  
   
1
Brand plaque***  
Key layout sheet  
(for Europe only /May already be  
affixed to the machine in some  
regions)  
(May already be affixed to the machine  
in some regions)  
* The appearance of the power cord and the telephone line cord may differ  
according to your country’s specifications.  
** The CD-ROM contains the Type 2200 Driver, the Operating Instructions and  
the Adobe Acrobat Reader program.  
***Peel off the brand plaque’s backing, and then stick down the plaque in the  
control panel’s left corner.  
NOTES  
:
• You should use the telephone line cord which is supplied with  
your machine. If you are replacing it with another vendor’s, it  
should be AWG #26 or larger telephone line cord.  
• The power cord must be plugged into a grounded power socket.  
• Components may differ from one country to another.  
Remove the packing tape from the front, back and sides of the  
machine.  
Tape  
GETTING STARTED 1.3  
Selecting a Location  
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air  
circulation. Allow extra space for opening covers and trays.  
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight  
or sources of heat, cold and humidity. Do not set the machine  
close to the edge of your desk or table.  
Clearance Space  
Front: 482.6 mm (enough space so that the paper tray can  
be removed)  
Back: 250 mm (enough space for ventilation)  
Right: 100 mm  
Left: 100 mm (enough space for ventilation)  
1.4  
GETTING STARTED  
1
Understanding the Component  
Location  
These are the main components of your machine:  
Front View  
Document Input  
Support  
Automatic Document  
Feeder  
Control Panel (See page 1.6)  
Document Output  
Tray  
Front Output Tray (Face down)  
Document  
Guides  
Paper Output  
Extension  
Front Cover  
Toner Cartridge  
Paper Level  
Indicator  
Optional Paper  
Tray (Tray 2)  
Manual Feeder  
Manual Feeder  
Guides  
Paper Tray(Tray 1)  
Rear View  
Rear Cover  
Rear Output  
Slot (Face up)  
Parallel Connector  
USB Connector  
Tray 2 Cable Connector  
EXT Jack  
Line Jack  
*
Power Switch  
*
If your country has a different  
telephone connection system,  
this socket may be blocked.  
AC Power Cord Connector  
GETTING STARTED 1.5  
Control Panel Functions  
Use to store frequently-dialed fax number and  
dial them with a touch of the buttons.  
1
Allows you to shift the one-touch buttons to  
the numbers 21 through 40.  
Scrolls through the options available for the  
selected menu item.  
Confirms the selection on the display.  
2
3
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
menus available.  
Returns you to the upper menu level.  
Displays the current status and prompts  
during an operation.  
1.6  
GETTING STARTED  
Allows you to select the fax receiving mode.  
1
• Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax  
numbers using a one or two-digit speed dial  
or group number for automatic dialing and  
edit the stored numbers.  
• Allows you to print a Phone book list.  
4
F
A
X
Adjusts the resolution of the documents for  
the current fax job.  
Allows you to send a fax to multiple  
destinations.  
Engages the telephone line.  
Redials the last number in Standby mode or  
inserts a pause into a fax number in Edit  
mode.  
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric  
characters.  
5
Adjusts the brightness of the documents for  
the current copy job.  
*1  
This button is called “Darkness” in this manual.  
Selects the document type for the current  
copy job.  
This button is called “Original Type” in this manual.  
6
C
O
P
Y
*2  
Makes a copy smaller or larger than the  
original document.  
Selects the number of copies.  
Stops an operation at any time.  
In Standby mode, clears/stop the copy  
options, such as the darkness, the document  
type setting, the copy size and the number of  
copies.  
7
Starts a job.  
GETTING STARTED 1.7  
Attaching Accessories  
Document Output Support  
Insert the two tabs on the supplied document output support  
into the slots on both sides of the paper output tray.  
Fold out the extender, if necessary.  
N
OTE:When detaching the  
document output tray, detach it by  
pressing the front portion of  
document output tray as seen from  
the picture. As this time, even  
though the dull sound is heard the  
components are safe from damge.  
1.8  
GETTING STARTED  
Installing the Toner Cartridge  
1
1
Open the front cover.  
2
Remove the starter toner cartridge from its bag. Gently roll  
the cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly  
inside the cartridge.  
Thoroughly rolling the cartridge will assure the maximum  
copies per cartridge.  
NOTES  
:
To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light for  
more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if left  
exposed for more than a few minutes.  
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
GETTING STARTED 1.9  
3
Slide the toner cartridge into the machine until it locks into  
place completely.  
4
Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely  
closed.  
1.10  
GETTING STARTED  
Loading Paper  
1
You can load approximately 250 sheets.  
To load a stack of Letter-sized paper:  
1
Pull open the paper tray and remove it from the machine.  
2
Push down on the pressure plate until it locks into place.  
3
Fan the edges of the paper stack to separate the pages.  
Then tap the stack on a flat surface to even it up.  
GETTING STARTED 1.11  
4
Insert the paper stack into the paper tray with the side you  
want to print facing up.  
NOTE: If you want to load a different size of paper, you need to  
adjust the paper guides. For details, see page 1.13.  
5
Pay attention to the paper limit mark on the left inside wall  
of the tray. Paper overloading may cause paper jams.  
6
Insert and slide the paper tray back into the machine.  
NOTE: After you load the paper, you need to set up your machine  
for the paper type and size you loaded. See page 1.32 for copying  
and faxing, or page 5.7 for PC-printing.  
1.12  
GETTING STARTED  
Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Tray  
1
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you  
need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.  
1
After pressing and unlatching the guide lock, slide the  
paper length guide out completely to extend the paper tray  
to its full length.  
P
2
After inserting paper into the tray, slide in the guide until it  
lightly touches the end of the paper stack.  
For the paper smaller than Letter, adjust the front paper  
length guide.  
GETTING STARTED 1.13  
3
Pinching the paper width guide as shown, move it toward the  
stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack.  
NOTES  
:
• Do not push the paper width guide far enough to cause the  
materials to warp.  
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper  
jams.  
1.14  
GETTING STARTED  
Making Connections  
1
Plug the telephone line cord into the LINE jack and the  
other end into the wall jack.  
To the walljack  
If you want to use your machine for receiving both faxes  
and voice calls, you will need to connect a telephone and/or  
answering machine to your machine.  
GETTING STARTED 1.15  
 
NOTE: In the United Kingdom, if a three-wire type (SHUNT-wire,  
older equipment) telephone or answering machine is connected to  
the EXT jack on the machine, the external equipment will fail to  
ring when receiving an incoming call as the machine is designed to  
operate with the latest technology. To prevent this incompatibility,  
use two-wire (newer equipment) telephone or answering  
machines.  
1.16  
GETTING STARTED  
Connecting to your computer  
1
Plug the USB printer cable into the connector on the back of  
the printer.  
You must use a USB 2.0 compliant cable that is no more  
than 3 m in length.  
If you want to use a parallel printer cable, purchase only  
IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable and connect it to the  
parallel connector on your machine.  
Push the metal clips down to fit inside the notches on the  
cable plug.  
NOTES  
:
• You only need to connect one of the cables mentioned above. Do  
not use the parallel and the USB cables at the same time.  
• If you are using a USB cable, you must be running Windows 98/  
Me/2000/XP.  
• When using the USB connection, your machine provides two USB  
modes; Fast and Slow. Fast is the default mode. Some PC users  
may experience poor USB function in the default mode. If this  
occurs, select the Slow mode to achieve successful results. For  
details about changing the USB mode.  
GETTING STARTED 1.17  
Turning the Machine On  
1
Plug one end of the supplied three-pronged electrical type  
cord into the AC socket on the machine and the other end  
into a properly grounded AC outlet.  
2
Press the power switch to turn the machine on.  
To the AC walljack  
WARNINGS  
:
• The fusing area inside the rear part of your machine becomes  
hot once the machine is turned on. Be careful when you access  
this area.  
• Do not disassemble the machine when it is turned on as it may  
give you an electric shock.  
1.18  
GETTING STARTED  
Installing Software  
1
About Software  
You must install software using the supplied CD-ROM after you  
have set up your machine and connected it to your computer.  
The CD-ROM includes:  
• Software  
• Operating Instructions  
• Adobe Acrobat Reader  
The CD-ROM provides you with the following software:  
Type 2200 Driver  
To use your machine as a printer and scanner in Windows, you  
must install the Type 2200 driver. For information about  
installing the Type 2200 driver in Windows, see page 1.21.  
Remote Control Panel  
This Windows-based program is automatically installed when  
you install the Type 2200 driver. For information about using the  
program, see page 4.36.  
GETTING STARTED 1.19  
 
Printer Driver Features  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
• Paper source selection  
• Paper size, orientation and media type  
• number of copies  
The following table lists a general overview of features  
supported by your printer drivers.  
Printer Driver  
Feature  
Win9x/Me  
Win2000/XP  
WinNT4.0  
Toner Save  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Print quality option  
Poster printing  
Multiple pages per  
sheet (N-up)  
Y
Y
Y
Fit to page printing  
Scale printing  
Watermark  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Overlay  
1.20  
GETTING STARTED  
Installing Software in Windows  
1
System Requirements  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the minimum  
requirements.  
Supported Operating System  
• Windows 95 OSR2  
• Windows 98/Windows 98 SE  
• Windows Me  
• Windows NT 4 Workstation or Server with Service Pack 3  
• Windows 2000 Professional or Advanced Server  
• Windows XP Home edition or Professional.  
Minimal Requirements  
• Disk space: 120 MB for installation  
• Memory: 64 MB  
• CPU: Pentium II 233 or higher  
• Required software: Internet Explorer 4.01  
Recommended  
• Disk space: 300 MB for installation  
• Memory: 128 MB  
• CPU: Pentium II 400 or higher  
• Required software: Internet Explorer 5.5  
NOTES  
:
• For Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, the system administrator should  
install software.  
• Windows 95 versions prior to OSR2 are not recommended due to  
incompatibility with OLE/COM libraries.  
GETTING STARTED 1.21  
Installing Software In Windows  
NOTES  
:
• Cancel the “New Hardware Found” window when your  
computer boots up.  
• Make sure that your machine is turned on and connected to your  
computer’s parallel port or USB port before installing  
software. Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 do not support the  
USB connection.  
1
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run and an maintenance  
window appears.  
If the maintenance window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter of your drive and click OK.  
NOTES: If your machine is not connected to the computer, the  
following window will appear.  
• After connecting the machine, click Next.  
• If you want to skip the connection status, click Next, and No to  
the following screen. Then the installation will start and the test  
page will not be printed at the end of the installation.  
1.22  
GETTING STARTED  
2
Choose the installation type.  
1
Typical: Installs the common software for your printer,  
such as printer driver, Twain driver, Remote Control Panel.  
This is recommeded for most users.  
Custom: Allows you to choose the language of the  
software and the components you want to install. After  
selecting the language and the component(s), click Next.  
View Operating Instructions: Allows you to view this  
Operating Instructions. If your computer doesn’t have  
Adobe Acrobat, click on this option and it will automatically  
install Adobe Acrobat for you.  
3
4
After the installation is finished, the window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the check box and click Next.  
When the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
GETTING STARTED 1.23  
5
Click Finish.  
NOTES  
:
• When you want to use your machine with the parallel cable,  
remove the USB cable and connect the parallel cable. Then  
reinstall the printer driver; select Start ¡ Programs ¡ Type  
2200 ¡ Maintenance ¡ Repair ¡ Printer. If you have  
replaced the parallel cable with the USB cable, do the same to  
reinstall the driver.  
• If your printer doesn’t work properly, reinstall the printer driver.  
Repairing Software  
Repairing is required if your installation fails or software does  
not work properly.  
1
You can select Start  
¡Maintenance.  
¡
Programs  
¡
Type 2200  
Otherwise, insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run and an maintenance  
window appears.  
If the maintenance window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter of your drive and click OK.  
2
Click Repair.  
1.24  
GETTING STARTED  
 
NOTE: If your machine is not connected to the computer, the  
following window will appear.  
1
• After connecting the machine, click Next.  
• If you want to skip the connection status, click Next, and No to  
the following screen. Then the installation will start and the test  
page will not be printed at the end of the installation.  
3
Select the components you want to reinstall and click Next.  
4
After the installation is finished, the window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the check box and click Next.  
5
6
When the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish.  
GETTING STARTED 1.25  
Removing Software  
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading software or if your  
installation fails.  
1
You can select Start  
Maintenance.  
¡
Programs  
¡
Type 2200  
¡
Otherwise, insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run and an maintenance  
window appears.  
If the maintenance window does not appear, click Start  
and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter of your drive and click OK.  
2
Click Remove.  
Then you will see a component list so that you can remove  
any of them individually.  
If you want to uninstall the printer driver, check Printer.  
If you want to uninstall the Twain driver, check Twain.  
If you want to uninstall the Remote Control Panel, check  
Remote Control Panel.  
3
4
After selecting items you wish to remove, click Next.  
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
click Yes.  
The selected driver and all of its components are removed  
from your computer.  
5
When the uninstallation is done, click Finish.  
1.26  
GETTING STARTED  
1
Setting Up the Machine  
System  
Changing the Display Language  
To change the language that displays on the display of the  
control panel, follow these steps:  
1
2
3
4
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Language” appears  
on the bottom line of the display.  
Press Enter. The current setting appears on the bottom  
line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the language you  
want appears on the display.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
GETTING STARTED 1.27  
Setting the Machine ID  
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax  
number on any fax you send. The Machine ID, containing your  
telephone number and name or company name, will be printed  
at the top of each page sent from your machine.  
1
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display. The first available menu item, “Machine ID”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter. The display asks you to enter the fax number.  
If there is a number already set, the number appears.  
Enter your fax number using the number keypad.  
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the  
button to delete the last digit.  
4
5
Press Enter when the number on the display is correct. The  
display asks you to enter the ID.  
Enter your name or company name using the number  
keypad.  
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the number  
keypad, and include special symbols by pressing the 0  
button.  
For details on how to use the number keypad to enter  
alphanumeric characters, see page 1.29.  
If you want to enter the same letter or number in  
succession (e.g. SS, AA, 777), enter one digit, move the  
cursor by pressing the  
button and enter the next digit.  
NOTE: When “Id” is printed at the top of each page you transmit,  
only the first 20 digits can be printed on the pages received at the  
other end.  
If you want to insert a space in the name, you can also use  
the  
button to move the cursor to skip the position.  
6
7
Press Enter when the name on the display is correct.  
Press Clear/Stop to return to Standby mode.  
1.28  
GETTING STARTED  
Entering Characters Using the Number  
Keypad  
1
As you perform various tasks, you need to enter names and  
numbers. For example, when you set up your machine, you  
enter your name or your company’s name and telephone  
number. When you store one or two digit speed dial or group dial  
numbers, you may also enter the corresponding names.  
To enter alphanumeric characters:  
1
When you are prompted to enter a letter,  
locate the button labeled with the  
character you want. Press the button  
until the correct letter appears on the  
display.  
For example, to enter the letter O, press  
6, labeled with “MNO.”  
Each time you press 6, the display shows  
a different letter, M, N, O and finally 6.  
You can enter special characters, such as space, plus sign,  
2
3
To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.  
If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the  
cursor by pressing the  
button and then press the button  
labeled with the letter you want. The cursor moves to the  
right and the next letter appears on the display.  
You can enter a space by pressing the  
button.  
When you finish entering letters, press Enter.  
GETTING STARTED 1.29  
Keypad Letters and Numbers  
Key  
1
Assigned numbers, letters or characters  
1
Space  
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
C
F
I
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
K
L
5
M
P
N
O
6
Q
R
V
S
8
7
T
U
W
+
X
Y
Z
9
-
,
.
/
*
#
&
0
Changing Numbers or Names  
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press  
the button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the  
correct numbers or characters.  
Inserting a Pause  
With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9,  
for example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases,  
you must insert a pause in the telephone number. You can insert  
a pause while you are setting up one-touch or speed dial  
numbers.  
To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place  
while entering the telephone number. A –” appears on the  
display at the corresponding location.  
1.30  
GETTING STARTED  
Setting the Date and Time  
1
The current date and time are shown on the display when your  
machine is on and ready to work. All of your faxes will have the  
date and time printed on them.  
NOTE: If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the  
correct time and date once the power is restored.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Date & Time”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad.  
Month  
Day  
= 01 ~ 12  
= 01 ~ 31  
Year  
Hour  
= requires all four digits  
= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)  
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)  
= 00 ~ 59  
Minute  
NOTE: The date format may differ from each country.  
You can also use the scroll button ( or ) to move the  
cursor under the digit you want to correct and enter a new  
number.  
4
5
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator,  
pressing the  
or  
button immediately moves the cursor  
to the indicator.  
You can change the clock mode to 24-hour format (e.g.  
01:00 PM as 13:00). For details, see page 1.32.  
Press Enter when the time and date on the display is  
correct.  
When you enter a wrong number, the machine beeps and  
does not proceed to the next step. If this happens, just  
reenter the correct number.  
GETTING STARTED 1.31  
Changing the Clock Mode  
You can set your machine to display the current time using  
either 12-hour or 24-hour format.  
1
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Clock Mode”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
The clock mode currently set for the machine displays.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to select the other mode  
and then press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Setting the Paper Type and Size  
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper type  
and size using the control panel buttons. These settings will apply  
to Fax and Copy modes. For PC-printing, you need to select the  
paper type and size in the application program you use.  
1
Press Menu.  
The display shows “Paper Setting” on the top line and the  
first menu item, “Paper Type,on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper type you  
are using and press Enter to save it.  
4
Press the ¤button to scroll to “Paper Size” and press  
Enter to access the menu item.  
5
6
Press Enter when “Tray 1 Size” displays on the bottom line.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper size you  
are using and press Enter to save it.  
7
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
1.32  
GETTING STARTED  
Setting Sounds  
1
You can control the following sounds:  
• Ringer: You can adjust the ringer volume.  
• Key Sound: With this option set to “On,” a key tone sounds  
each time any key is pressed.  
• Alarm Sound: You can turn the alarm sound on or off. With  
this option set to “On,an alarm tone sounds when an error  
occurs or fax communication ends.  
• Speaker: You can turn on or off the sounds from the  
telephone line through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a  
fax tone. With this option set to “Comm.,the speaker is on  
until the remote machine answers.  
You can adjust the speaker volume level using the On Hook  
Dial button  
.
Speaker, Ringer, Key Sound and Alarm Sound  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Sound/Volume” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the options.  
Press Enter when you see the sound option you want.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the status or  
loudness you want for the option you have selected.  
For the ringer volume, you can select from “Off, Low, Med”  
and “High. Setting “Off” means that the ringer turns off. The  
machine works normally even if the ringer is turned off.  
4
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
If necessary, repeat steps 2 through 4.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
GETTING STARTED 1.33  
Speaker Volume  
To adjust the volume using the On Hook Dial button:  
1
2
Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from the speaker.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you hear the loudness  
you want. The display shows the current volume level.  
3
Press Clear/Stop to save the change and return to  
Standby mode.  
Using the Save Mode  
Power Save Mode  
Power Save mode allows your machine to reduce power  
consumption when it is not in actual use. You can turn this mode  
on by selecting the length of time for which the machine waits  
after a job is printed before it switches to a reduced power state.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Power Save”  
appears on the bottom line. Press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “On” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
Selecting “Off” means that Power Save mode turns off.  
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the time settings you  
want appears.  
The available options are 5, 10, 15, 30 and 45 (minutes).  
Press Enter to save the selection.  
5
6
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
1.34  
GETTING STARTED  
PAPER HANDLING  
2
This chapter introduces you to the basics of selecting  
print materials and loading them into your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
 
Selecting Print Materials  
You can print on a variety of print materials, such as plain paper,  
envelopes, labels, transparencies and so on. Always use print  
materials that meet the guidelines for use with this machine.  
See “Paper Specifications” on page 9.9. To get the best possible  
print quality, use only high-quality copier-grade paper.  
When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
• Desired outcome: The paper you choose should be  
appropriate for your project.  
• Size: You can use any size paper that fits easily within the  
paper adjusters of the paper tray.  
• Weight: Your machine supports paper weights as follows:  
- 16 ~ 24 lb (60 ~ 90 g/m2) bond for the standard paper tray  
(Tray 1) and optional paper tray (Tray 2)  
- 16 ~ 43 lbs (60 ~ 163 g/m2) bond for the manual feeder  
• Brightness: Some papers are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the paper affects  
how crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
NOTE: Using print materials that dose not conform to the  
specifications listed on page 9.9 may cause problems that may  
require service. This service is not covered by the warranty or  
service agreements.  
Type, Input Sources and Capacities  
Input Source/Capacity*  
Paper Type  
Optional  
Tray 2  
Manual  
Feeder  
Tray 1  
Plain paper  
Envelopes  
Labels  
250  
250  
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Transparencies  
Card stocks  
* Maximum capacity may be reduced depending on the paper thickness.  
2.2  
PAPER HANDLING  
   
Guidelines for Paper and Special Materials  
When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other special  
material, keep these guidelines in mind:  
• Always use paper and other materials that conform with the  
specifications listed under “Paper Specifications” on page 9.9.  
• Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper  
can cause paper jams and the poor print quality.  
2
• Use only high quality copier grade paper for the best print  
quality.  
• Avoid paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or a texture  
that is too smooth or too rough. Paper jams may occur.  
• Store paper in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use.  
Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not  
place heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is  
packaged or unpackaged. Keep it away from moisture, or  
other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl.  
• Store unused materials at temperatures between 15 oC and  
30 oC (59 oF to 86 oF). The relative humidity should be  
between 10 % and 70 %.  
• During storage, you should use moisture-proof wrap, such as  
any plastic container or bag, to prevent dust and moisture  
from contaminating your paper.  
• Load special paper types one sheet at a time.  
• Only use materials specifically recommended for use in laser  
printers.  
To prevent special materials, such as transparencies and label  
sheets from sticking together, remove them as they prints out.  
• For envelopes:  
- Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp, well  
creased folds.  
- Do not use envelopes with clasps and snaps.  
- Do not use envelopes with windows, coated lining, self-  
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.  
- Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
• For transparencies:  
- Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the  
machine.  
- Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time.  
Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty  
printing.  
- To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them and  
coated paper carefully.  
PAPER HANDLING 2.3  
   
- To avoid fading, do not expose the printed transparencies to  
prolonged sunlight.  
• For labels:  
- Verify that their adhesive material can tolerate fusing  
temperature of 200 oC (392o F) for 0.1 second.  
- Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material  
between them. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off  
during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed  
adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.  
- Do not load a sheet of them through the machine more than  
once. The adhesive backing is designed for one pass  
through the machine.  
- Do not use labels that are separating from the backing  
sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.  
• Do not use Carbonless paper and Tracing paper. They could  
make smell of chemicals and damage your machine.  
Selecting an Output Location  
The machine has two output locations; the rear output slot (face  
up) and the front output tray (face down).  
To use the front output tray, make sure that the rear cover is  
closed. To use the rear output slot, open the rear cover.  
NOTES  
:
• If paper coming out of the front output tray has problems, such  
as excessive curl, try printing to the rear output slot.  
To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear cover while  
the machine is printing.  
2.4  
PAPER HANDLING  
Printing to the Front Output Tray (Face down)  
The front output tray collects printed paper face-down in correct  
order. The tray should be used for most print jobs.  
2
Printing to the Rear Output Slot (Face up)  
Using the rear output slot, paper comes out of the machine face up.  
Printing from the manual feeder to the rear output slot provides  
the straight paper path. Using the rear output slot might  
improve the output quality with the following:  
• envelopes  
• labels  
• small custom-sized paper  
• postcards  
• transparencies  
PAPER HANDLING 2.5  
To use the rear output slot:  
Open the rear cover by pulling it upward.  
1
WARNING: The fusing area inside the rear part of your machine  
becomes hot once the machine is turned on. Be careful when you  
access this area.  
2
If you do not want to use the rear output slot, close the  
rear cover. The pages stack on the front output tray.  
2.6  
PAPER HANDLING  
Loading Paper in the Paper Tray  
The paper tray can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of 20 lb plain  
paper. For faxing and copying, you can use A4-, Letter- or Legal-  
sized paper only. For PC-printing, you can use many different  
sizes of paper; see page 9.9.  
2
The paper level indicator on the front of the paper tray shows  
the amount of paper currently left in the tray. When the tray is  
empty, the indicator of the bar is lowered.  
❷¤Paper full  
Paper empty œ  
To load paper, pull open the paper tray and load paper with the  
print side face down.  
You can load letterhead paper with the design side face down.  
The top edge of the sheet with the logo should be placed at the  
front side of the tray.  
For details about loading paper in the paper tray, see “Loading  
NOTES  
:
• If you experience problems with paper feed, place the paper in  
the manual feeder.  
• You can load up to 150 sheets of previously printed paper. The  
printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the top  
side. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper  
around. Note that the print quality is not guaranteed.  
PAPER HANDLING 2.7  
Using the Manual Feeder  
Use the manual feeder to print transparencies, labels, envelopes  
or postcards in addition to making quick runs of paper types or  
sizes that are not currently loaded in the paper tray.  
Postcards, 3.5 by 5.83 in.(index) cards and other custom-sized  
materials can be printed with this printer. The minimum size is  
76 by 127 mm (3.0 by 5.0 in.) and the maximum size is 216 by  
356 mm (8.5 by 14 in.)  
Acceptable print materials are plain paper with sizes ranging  
from 100 x 148 mm (3.9 x 5.8 in.) to Legal, 216 x 356 mm (8.5  
x 14 in.), the largest size acceptable, and weighing between 16  
lb and 32 lb.  
NOTES  
:
• Always load only the print materials specified in the  
Specifications on page 9.9 to avoid paper jams and print quality  
problems.  
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before  
loading them into the manual feeder.  
• When you print on 76 mm X 127 mm (3 X 5 in.) sized media with  
loading into the tray, open the rear output tray.  
1
Load a sheet of the print material with the print side face  
up into the center of the manual feeder.  
For envelopes, load a sheet with the flap side face down  
and with the stamp area on the top left side.  
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid  
touching the print side. Oils from your fingers can cause  
print quality problems.  
NOTE: You must open the rear output slot when you print on  
transparencies. If not, they may tear while exiting the machine.  
2.8  
PAPER HANDLING  
2
Adjust the paper guide to the width of the print material.  
2
NOTE: When printing on previously printed paper from the  
manual feeder, the printed side should be facing down with an  
uncurled edge to the machine. If you experience problems with  
paper feed, turn the paper around.  
3
Open the rear cover to use the rear output slot.  
4
After printing, close the rear cover.  
PAPER HANDLING 2.9  
Setting the Paper Type and Size for the  
Manual Feeder  
After loading paper in the manual feeder, you need to set the  
correct paper type and size using the control panel buttons.  
These settings will apply to Copy mode. For PC-printing, you  
need to select the paper size in the application program you use.  
To set the paper size for the manual feeder:  
1
Press Menu.  
The display shows “Paper Setting” on the top line and the  
first item, “Paper Type,on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper type you  
are using and press Enter to save it.  
4
5
6
7
Press the ¤button to scroll to “Paper Size” and press  
Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to display “Manual Feed” on  
the bottom line. Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper size you  
are using and press Enter to save it.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
2.10  
PAPER HANDLING  
COPYING  
3
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying  
documents.  
This chapter includes:  
Loading Paper for Copying  
The instructions for loading print materials are the same  
whether you are printing, faxing or copying. For coping, you can  
use Letter-, A4-, Legal-sized print materials. For further details,  
loading in the manual feeder.  
Preparing a Document  
Using the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder), you can load up  
to 20 documents (weight: 75 g/m2, 20 lb) for one job.  
When you use the ADF:  
• Do not load documents smaller than 142 x 148 mm or larger  
than 216 x 356 mm.  
• Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents:  
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
- coated paper  
- onion skin or thin paper  
- wrinkled or creased paper  
- curled or rolled paper  
- torn paper  
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading documents.  
• Make sure any glue, ink or correction fluid on the paper is  
completely dry before loading documents.  
• Do not load documents containing different sizes or weights  
of paper.  
• Do not load booklet, pamphlet, transparencies or documents  
having other unusual characteristics.  
3.2  
COPYING  
Making a Copy  
1
2
3
Pull the document support all the way out. Fold out the  
extender, if necessary.  
Load the documents up to 50 pages face down into the ADF.  
3
Adjust the document guides to the document size.  
4
5
Customize the copy settings including number of copies,  
copy size, contrast and image by using the control panel  
the copy job. For example, if you make 2 copies of 3 page  
documents, one complete 3 page document will print  
followed by the second complete document. see page 3.8  
To clear the settings, use the Clear/Stop button.  
Press Start.  
COPYING 3.3  
Setting Copy Options  
The buttons on the control panel let you make all the basic copy  
options; contrast, document type, copy size and number of  
copies. Set the following options for the current copy job before  
pressing Start to make copies.  
NOTE: If you press Clear/Stop while you set the copy options,  
all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be  
canceled and return to their default status. Or, they will  
automatically return to their default status after the machine  
completes the copy.  
Darkness  
If you have an original document containing faint markings and  
dark images, you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that  
is easier to read.  
To adjust the contrast, press Darkness  
. Each time you  
press the button, the LED labeled with the selected mode turns  
on.  
You can choose from the following darkness modes:  
Lighten: works well with dark print.  
Normal: works well with standard typed or printed  
documents.  
Darken: works well with light print or faint pencil markings.  
3.4  
COPYING  
Original Type  
The image setting is used to improve the copy quality by  
selecting the document for the current copy job.  
To select the document type, press Original Type  
time you press the button, the LED labeled with the selected  
mode turns on.  
. Each  
You can choose from the following image modes:  
Text: Use for documents containing mostly text.  
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.  
NOTE: When you copy a document containing color on the  
background, such as a newspaper or a catalog, you can get the  
background on your copy. If you want to reduce the background,  
change the Darknen setting to Lighten and/or the Original Type  
3
setting to Text  
.
Number of Copies  
Using the No. of Copies button, you can select the number of  
copies from 1 to 99.  
1
2
Press No. of Copies.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the number you want  
appears on the display.  
Pressing and holding the buttons allows you to quickly  
increase and decreases in increments of 5.  
You can enter the value using the number keypad.  
3
Press Enter to save the selection.  
COPYING 3.5  
   
Reduced/Enlarged Copying  
Using the Reduce/Enlarge button, you can reduce or enlarge  
the size of a copied image from 50% to 200%.  
To select from the predefined copy sizes:  
1
Press Reduce/Enlarge.  
The default setting appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
2
3
Use Reduce/Enlarge or the scroll button ( or ) to find  
the size setting you want.  
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To fine-tune the size of copies:  
1
2
Press Reduce/Enlarge.  
Press Reduce/Enlarge or the scroll button ( or ) until  
“Custom:50-200%” displays on the bottom line. Press  
Enter.  
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the copy size you  
want appears on the display.  
Pressing and holding the buttons allows you to quickly  
increase and decreases in increments of 5.  
You can enter the value using the number keypad.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection.  
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at  
the bottom of your copy.  
3.6  
COPYING  
Changing the Default Settings  
Copy options, including contrast, image, copy size and number  
of copies, can be set to the most frequently used modes. When  
you copy a document, the default settings are used unless they  
are changed by using the corresponding buttons on the control  
panel.  
To create your own default settings:  
1
Press Menu on the control panel until “Copy Setup”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
The first menu item, “Default-Change, appears on the  
bottom line.  
3
2
3
4
5
Press Enter to access the menu item. The first setup  
option, “Darken,appears on the bottom line.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the setup  
options.  
When the option you want to set appears, press Enter to  
access the option.  
Change the setting using the scroll button ( or ) or  
enter the value using the number keypad.  
6
7
8
Press Enter to save the selection.  
Repeat steps 3 through 6, as needed.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing Clear/Stop cancels  
the changed settings and restores their default status.  
COPYING 3.7  
Setting the Time Out Option  
You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the  
default copy settings, if you do not start copying after changing  
them on the control panel.  
1
Press Menu on the control panel until “Copy Setup”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Timeout” on  
the bottom line.  
3
4
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the status you want  
appears on the display.  
You can select from 15, 30, 60 and 180 (seconds).  
Selecting “Off” means that the machine does not restore  
the default settings until you press Start to start copying,  
or Clear/Stop to cancel.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Collation Copying  
The Collation copying feature is available only when you load  
documents in the ADF.  
1
2
Press Menu on the control panel until “Copy Setup”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button (or ) to display “Copy Collated”  
on the bottom line.  
3
4
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
If you are making multiple copies and want to collate them,  
press the scroll button (or ) to set Collated Copy to  
On  
and press Enter.  
1
1
1
2
3
2
2
1
3
2
3
3
œ
Collated Copy Off  
œ
Collated Copy On  
5
Press Start to begin copying.  
3.8  
COPYING  
   
FAXING  
4
This chapter gives you information about using your  
machine as a fax machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Sending a Fax  
Changing the Fax Setup options  
1
Press Menu until “Fax Setup” appears on the top line of the  
display.  
The first available menu item, “Ring To Answer,displays on  
the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the menu item you  
want on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the status or use the  
number keypad to enter the value for the option you have  
selected.  
4
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
If necessary, repeat steps 2 through 4.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
4.2  
FAXING  
     
Available Fax Setup Options  
You can use the following setup options for configuring the fax  
system:  
Option  
Description  
Ring To Answer  
You can specify the number of times the machine rings, 1 to  
7, before answering an incoming call.  
Darkness  
You can select the default darkness mode to fax your  
documents lighter or darker.  
Lighten works well with dark print.  
Normal works well with standard typed or printed  
documents.  
Darken works well with light print or faint pencil  
markings.  
Redial Term  
Your machine can automatically redial a remote fax machine  
when the line is busy. Intervals from 1 to 15 minutes can be  
entered.  
Redials  
You can specify the number of redial attempts, 0 to 13. If  
you enter  
0, the machine will not redial.  
4
MSG Confirm  
You can set your machine to print a report showing whether  
the transmission was successful, how many pages were  
sent, and more. The available options are On Off and On-  
,
Error, which prints only when a transmission is not  
successful.  
Auto Report  
A report with detailed information about the previous 50  
communications operations, including time and dates. The  
available options are On or Off  
.
Auto Reduction  
When receiving a document as long as or longer than the  
paper loaded in the paper tray, the machine can reduce the  
size of the document to fit the size of paper loaded in the  
machine. Select On if you want to automatically reduce an  
incoming page.  
With this feature set to Off, the machine cannot reduce the  
document to fit onto one page, the document is divided and  
printed in actual size on two or more pages.  
FAXING 4.3  
Option  
Discard Size  
Description  
When receiving a document as long as longer than the  
paper installed in your machine, you can set the machine to  
discard any excess at the bottom of the page. If the  
received page is outside the margin you set, it will print on  
two sheets of paper at the actual size.  
When the document is within the margin and the Auto  
Reduction feature is turned on, the machine reduces the  
document to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper and  
discard does not occur. If the Auto Reduction feature is  
turned off or fails, the data within the margin will be  
discarded. Settings range from 0 to 30 mm.  
Receive Code  
DRPD Mode  
The Receive Code allows you to initiate fax reception from  
an extension phone plugged into the EXT jack on the back  
of the machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear  
fax tones, enter the Receive Code. The Receive Code is  
preset to  
9
at the factory. Settings range from 0 to 9.  
You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection (DRPD) feature which enables a user to use a  
single telephone line to answer several different telephone  
numbers. In this menu, you can set the machine to  
recognize the ring patterns to answer. See page 4.13  
4.4  
FAXING  
Loading a Document  
1
Pull the document input support all the way out. Fold out  
the extender, if necessary.  
2
Load the documents up to 50 pages face down into the  
ADF and adjust the document guides to the document size.  
4
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document,  
3
Adjust the document resolution, referring to page 4.6.  
FAXING 4.5  
Adjusting the Document Resolution  
The default document settings produce good results when  
setting typical text based documents.  
However, if you send documents that are of a poor quality, or  
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a  
higher quality fax.  
1
2
Press Resolution on the control panel.  
By pressing Resolution or the scroll button ( or ), you  
can choose from Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Photo.  
The document types recommended for the resolution settings  
are described in the following table below:  
Mode  
Standard  
Fine  
Recommended for:  
Documents with normal-sized characters.  
Documents containing small characters or thin  
lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Super Fine  
Photo  
Documents containing extremely fine detail.  
Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote  
machine also supports the Super Fine  
resolution. See the notes below.  
Documents containing shades of gray or  
photographs.  
NOTES  
:
• For the memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available.  
The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
• When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the  
remote fax machine does not support the Super Fine resolution,  
the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode  
supported by the remote fax machine.  
4.6  
FAXING  
Sending a Fax Automatically  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Enter the remote fax phone number using the number  
keypad.  
You can use the one-touch keypad or speed or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see page 4.9.  
Press Start.  
The number is dialed and then the machine begins sending  
the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.  
NOTE: When you want to cancel the fax job, press Clear/Stop  
at any time while sending the fax.  
4
FAXING 4.7  
Sending a Fax Manually  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Press On Hook Dial . You hear a dial tone.  
Enter the remote fax machine’s fax number using the  
number keypad.  
You can use the one-touch keypad or speed or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see page 4.9.  
5
When you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote  
fax machine, press Start.  
NOTE: When you want to cancel the fax job, press Clear/Stop  
at any time while sending the fax.  
Redialing the Last Number  
To redial the last number you dialed:  
Press Redial/Pause.  
If a document is loaded in the ADF, the machine automatically  
begins to send.  
4.8  
FAXING  
   
Confirming Transmission  
When the last page of your document has been sent  
successfully, the machine beeps and returns to Standby Mode.  
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error  
message appears on the display. For a listing of error messages  
and their meanings, See page 8.8.  
If you receive an error message, press Clear/Stop to clear the  
message and try to send the document again.  
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report  
automatically each time sending a fax is completed. For further  
details, see the MSG Confirm item on page 4.3.  
Automatic Redialing  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer  
when you send a fax, the machine automatically redials the  
number every three minutes up to seven times by the factory  
default settings.  
When the display shows “[Retry Redial ?],press Enter to redial  
the number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing,  
press Clear/Stop.  
4
To change the time interval between redials and the number of  
redial attempts. See page 4.3.  
FAXING 4.9  
Receiving a Fax  
About Receiving Modes  
• In Fax mode, the machine answers an incoming fax call and  
immediately goes into the fax reception mode.  
• In Tel mode, you can receive a fax by pressing On Hook  
Dial (you can hear a fax tone from the remote machine) and  
then pressing Start on the control panel of your machine.  
You can also of the extension phone and then press the  
remote receive code; see page 4.13.  
• In Ans/Fax mode, the answering machine answers an  
incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the  
answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on  
the line, the call automatically switches to Fax mode.  
In DRPD mode, you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring  
Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. “Distinctive Ring” is a  
telephone company service which enables a user to use a single  
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.  
For further details. See page 4.13  
The current receiving mode displays when the machine is in  
Standby mode.  
When the memory is full, the receiving mode automatically  
switches to Tel.  
NOTES  
:
To use Ans/Fax mode, connect an answering machine to the EXT  
jack on the back of your machine. see page 1.15.  
• If you do not want other people to view your received  
documents, you can use Secure Receiving mode. In this mode,  
all of the received faxes are stored in the memory. For further  
details, see page 4.29.  
4.10  
FAXING  
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes  
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same  
whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes  
can only be printed on Letter-, A4- or Legal-sized plain paper.  
For details about loading paper and setting the paper size in the  
Receiving Automatically in Fax Mode  
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. If you have  
changed the receiving mode, take the following steps to receive  
faxes automatically:  
1
2
Press Receive Mode.  
Press and hold Receive Mode until “Fax” displays on the  
bottom line. You may have to repeat this action once or  
twice, depending on the mode you’re in.  
3
When you receive a fax, the machine answers the call on a  
specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax.  
4
To change the number of rings, see page 4.3.  
FAXING 4.11  
Receiving Automatically in Ans/Fax Mode  
For using this mode, you must attach an answering machine to  
the EXT jack on the back of your machine. See page 1.15.  
1
2
Press Receive Mode.  
Press and hold Receive Mode until “Ans/Fax” displays on  
the bottom line. You may have to repeat this action once or  
twice, depending on the mode you’re in.  
3
When you receive a call, the answering machine answers.  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine  
stores the message as it would normally. If your machine  
hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to  
receive the fax.  
NOTES  
:
• When you have set your machine to Ans/Fax mode and your  
answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is  
connected to the EXT jack, your machine automatically goes into  
Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.  
• If your answering machine has a “user-selectable ring counter,”  
set it to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
• If you are in Tel mode, which is receiving faxes manually, when  
the answering machine is connected to your machine, you must  
switch off the answering machine, or the outgoing message from  
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
Receiving Manually in Tel Mode  
You can answer calls using the On Hook Dial button.  
1
2
Press Receive Mode.  
Press and hold Receive Mode until “Tel” displays on the  
bottom line. You may have to repeat this action once or  
twice, depending on the mode you’re in.  
3
4
When you receive a fax call, press On Hook Dial.  
You can hear a fax tone from the remote machine.  
Press Start to receive the fax.  
The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to Standby  
Mode when the reception is completed.  
4.12  
FAXING  
     
Receiving Manually Using Remote  
Receive Start Code  
You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the  
extension telephone without going to the fax machine.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax  
tones, press the keys  
9
on the extension telephone. The  
machine receives the document.  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax  
tone from the remote machine, try pressing  
9
once again.  
9
is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first  
and the last asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle  
number to whatever you choose. For details about changing the  
code, see page 4.4.  
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode  
“Distinctive Ring” is a telephone company service which enables  
a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different  
telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call  
you on is identified by different ringing patterns, which consist  
of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds. This  
feature is often used by answering services who answer  
4
telephones for many different clients and need to know which  
number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.  
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature, your fax  
machine can “learn” the ring pattern you designate to be  
answered by the FAX machine. Unless you change it, this ringing  
pattern will continue to be recognised and answered as a FAX  
call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the  
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the  
EXT. jack. You can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring  
Pattern Detection at any time.  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option,  
Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line  
by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection, you will need another telephone line at your location,  
or someone available to dial your FAX number from outside.  
FAXING 4.13  
To set up the DRPD mode:  
1
Press Menu until “Fax Setup” appears on the top line of the  
display.  
The first available menu item, “Receive Mode,displays on  
the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “DRPD Mode”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
When “Set” displays on the bottom line, press Enter.  
The LCD displays ‘[Waiting Ring].”  
4
5
Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not  
necessary to place the call from a fax machine.  
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call.  
The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
When the machine completes learning, the LCD displays  
“End DRPD [Setup].  
If the DRPD setup fails, “DRPD Ring Error” appears. Press  
Enter when “DRPD Mode” displays and retry from Step 3.  
6
To return to Standby Mode, press Clear/Stop.  
When the DRPD feature is set up, the DRPD option is available  
in the Receive Mode menu. To receive faxes in the DRPD mode,  
you need to set the menu to DRPD.  
NOTES  
:
• DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or  
connect the machine to another telephone line.  
• After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify  
that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call  
placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be  
sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or  
answering machine plugged into the EXT. jack.  
Receiving Faxes in the Memory  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive  
faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a  
fax while you are copying or printing, your machine stores  
incoming faxes in the memory. Then, as soon as you finish  
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.  
4.14  
FAXING  
Automatic Dialing  
One-touch Dialing  
The 20 one-touch buttons on the control panel lets you store  
frequently-used fax numbers and dial a number automatically  
with a touch of a button.  
Using the  
button, you can store up to 40 fax  
numbers on the one-touch buttons.  
Storing a Number for One-touch Dialing  
1
Press and hold one of the one-touch dial buttons for about  
2 seconds.  
The display asks you to enter the fax number. T” signifies  
that you are assigning a one-touch dial button.  
If you want to use one-touch dial buttons from 21 to 40,  
press  
and hold down the one-touch dial button  
for about 2 seconds.  
4
2
3
Enter the number you want to store using the number  
keypad and press Enter.  
To insert a pause between numbers, press Redial/Pause.  
A symbol “-” appears on the display.  
If you make a mistake while entering a number, press the  
¤
button and re-enter the correct number.  
To assign a name to the number, enter the name you want.  
For details about entering characters, see page 1.29.  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
4
5
Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
To store more numbers, press a one-touch button and  
repeat steps 2 through 4.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
FAXING 4.15  
Sending a Fax using a One-touch Number  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Press the one-touch button where you stored a number.  
The document scans into the memory.  
The machine dials the fax number stored in the one-touch  
dial location and the document is sent when the remote fax  
machine answers.  
Speed Dialing  
You can store up to 150 frequently-dialed numbers in one, two  
or three-digit speed dial locations (0-149).  
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter.  
3
Press Enter when “Speed Dials” appears on the display.  
If you want to use one-touch dial buttons from 21 to 40,  
press  
and hold down the one-touch dial button  
for about 2 seconds.  
The display prompts you to enter a location number,  
showing the first available number.  
4
Enter a one or two-digit speed dial number between 0 and  
149, using the number keypad or scroll button ( or  
)
and press Enter.  
If a number is already stored in the location you chose, the  
display shows the number to allow you to change it. To start  
over with another speed-dial number, press Upper Level.  
4.16  
FAXING  
5
6
Enter the number you want to store using the number  
keypad and press Enter.  
To insert a pause between numbers, press Redial/Pause.  
A symbol “-” appears on the display.  
To assign a name to the number, enter the name you want.  
For details about entering characters, see page 1.29.  
OR  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
7
8
Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 4 through 7.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Sending a Fax using a Speed Number  
1
Feed the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
4
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Enter the speed dial number.  
• For a one-digit speed dial number, press and hold the  
appropriate digit button.  
• For a two or three-digit speed dial number, press the first  
digit button and hold the last digit button.  
The corresponding entry’s name briefly displays.  
The document scans into the memory.  
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is  
automatically dialed. The document is sent when the  
remote fax machine answers.  
FAXING 4.17  
Group Dialing  
If you frequently send the same document to several  
destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and  
set them under a group dial location. This enables you to use a  
group dial number setting to send the same document to all the  
destinations within the group.  
Setting a Group Dial Number  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Group Dials” on  
the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press Enter when “New” displays on the bottom line.  
The display prompts you to enter a location number,  
showing the first available number.  
5
6
7
8
9
Enter a group number between 0 and 149 using the  
number keypad or scroll button ( or ) and press Enter.  
Press a one-touch dial button, or enter a speed number you  
want to include in the group and press Enter.  
When the display confirms the number to be added to the  
group, press Enter.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter other one-touch dial or speed  
dial numbers into the group.  
Press Upper Level when you have entered all of the  
numbers. The display prompts you to enter a group ID.  
10To assign a name to the group, enter the name.  
OR  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
11 Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
4.18  
FAXING  
12 If you want to assign another group, press Enter and  
repeat from step 5.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number in another  
group dial number.  
Editing Group Dial Numbers  
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected  
group or add a new number to the selected group.  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Group Dials” on  
the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Edit” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
5
6
Enter the group number you want to edit and press Enter.  
4
Press a one-touch dial button to enter a speed dial number  
you want to add or delete.  
7
When you enter the specific number in the group, the  
display shows “Delete?.”  
When you enter a new number, the display shows “Add?.”  
Press Enter to add or delete the number.  
8
9
To change the group name, press Upper Level.  
10 Enter a new group name and press Enter.  
11 If you want to edit another group, press Enter and repeat  
from step 5.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
FAXING 4.19  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing  
(Multi-address Transmission)  
You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed  
transmissions.  
Follow the procedure of the operation (Broadcasting  
transmission; see page 4.22, Delayed transmission; see  
page 4.23, Prioritytransmissionpage 4.25, DelayedRXPolling  
transmissionpage 4.26). When you come to a step in which the  
display asks you to enter the remote fax number:  
• For a one-digit group number, press and hold the appropriate  
digit button.  
• For a two-digit group number, press the first digit button and  
hold the last digit button.  
You can use only one group number for one operation. Then  
continue the procedure to complete the operation.  
Your machine automatically scans the document loaded in the  
ADF and then dials each of the numbers included in the group.  
Searching for a Number in the Memory  
There are two ways to search for a number in the memory. You  
can either scan from A to Z sequentially, or you can search using  
the first letter of the name associated with the number.  
Searching Sequentially through the Memory  
1
2
3
Press Phone Book.  
Press Enter when “Search&Dial” appears on the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the  
memory until the name and number you want to dial  
display. You can search upwards or downwards through the  
entire memory in alphabetical order, from A to Z.  
While searching through the machine’s memory, you can  
see that each entry is preceded by one of three letters; “T”  
for one-touch dial, “S” for speed dial or “G” for group dial  
number. These letters tell you how the number is stored.  
4
When the name and/or the number you want displays,  
press Start or Enter to dial.  
4.20  
FAXING  
Searching with a Particular First Letter  
1
2
3
Press Phone Book.  
Press Enter when “Search&Dial” appears on the display.  
Press the button labeled with the letter you want to search  
for. A name beginning with the letter displays.  
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,press  
the 6 button, which is labeled with “MNO.”  
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the next name.  
When the name and/or the number you want displays,  
press Start or Enter to dial.  
Printing a Phone Book List  
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Phone  
Book list.  
1
2
Press Phone Book.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) until  
“Print” appears on the bottom line and press Enter.  
4
A list showing your one-touch dial, speed dial and group dial  
entries prints out.  
FAXING 4.21  
Advanced Fax Functions  
Sending Broadcasting Faxes  
Using the Broadcasting button on the control panel, you can use  
the broadcasting fax feature, which allows you to send a document  
to multiple locations. Documents are automatically stored in the  
memory and sent to a remote station. After transmission, the  
documents are automatically erased from the memory.  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Press Broadcasting on the control panel.  
Enter the number of the remote machine using the number  
keypad.  
You can use one-touch keypad or speed dial or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see page 4.15.  
5
Press Enter to confirm the number. The display asks you to  
enter another fax number to send the document.  
NOTE: The Another No. prompt does not appear if you have  
added numbers for another broadcasting or delay fax job. You  
must wait until the job is completed.  
6
To enter more fax numbers, press 1 to select “Yes” and  
repeat steps 4 and 5. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Note that you cannot use group dial numbers for another  
fax number.  
7
When you finish entering fax numbers, press 2 to select  
“No” at a Another No. prompt.  
The document is scanned into the memory before  
transmission. The display shows the memory capacity and  
the number of pages being stored in the memory.  
The machine begins sending the document in order of the  
numbers you entered.  
4.22  
FAXING  
 
Sending a Delayed Fax  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you  
will not be present.  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display. The first available menu item, “DelayFax,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
4
5
Press Enter.  
Enter the number of the remote machine using the number  
keypad.  
You can use one-touch keypad or speed dial or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see  
4
6
Press Enter to confirm the number on the display. The  
display asks you to enter another fax number to send the  
document.  
NOTE: The Another No. prompt does not appear if you have  
added numbers for another broadcasting or delay fax job. You  
must wait until the job is completed.  
7
8
To enter more fax numbers, press 1 to select “Yes” and  
repeat steps 4 and 5. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Note that you cannot use group dial numbers for another  
fax number.  
When you finish entering fax numbers, press 2 to select  
“No  
at a Another No. prompt.  
The display asks you to enter a name.  
FAXING 4.23  
9
To assign a name to the transmission, enter the name. If  
not, skip this step.  
For details on how to enter the name using the number  
keypad, see page 1.29.  
10 Press Enter.  
The display shows the current time and asks you to enter  
the starting time when the fax is to be sent.  
11 Enter the time using the number keypad.  
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the  
document will be sent at that time on the following day.  
12 Press Enter when the starting time displays correctly.  
The document is scanned into the memory before  
transmission. The display shows the memory capacity and  
the number of pages being stored in the memory.  
The machine returns to Standby mode. The display reminds  
you that you are in Standby mode and that a delayed fax is  
set.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the delayed transmission, see  
4.24  
FAXING  
Sending a Priority Fax  
Using the Priority Fax feature, a high priority document can be  
sent ahead of reserved operations. The document is scanned  
into the memory and transmitted when the current operation is  
finished. In addition, the priority transmission interrupts a  
broadcast operation between stations (i.e., when the  
transmission to station A ends, before transmission to station B  
begins) or between redial attempts.  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
5
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Priority Fax” on  
the bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the number of the remote machine using the number  
keypad.  
4
To enter the number, you can use one-touch keypad or  
speed dial or group dial numbers. For details, see  
6
7
Press Enter to confirm the number. The display asks you to  
enter a name.  
To assign a name to the transmission, enter the name. If  
not, skip this step.  
For details on how to enter a name using the number  
keypad, see page 1.29.  
8
Press Enter.  
The document is scanned into the memory before  
transmission. The display shows the memory capacity and  
the number of pages being stored in the memory.  
The machine shows the number being dialed and begins  
sending the document.  
FAXING 4.25  
Polling a Remote Machine  
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send  
a document. This is useful when the person with the original  
document to be sent is not in the office. The person who wants  
to receive the document calls the machine holding it and  
requests that the document be sent. In other words, it “polls”  
the machine holding the original document.  
You can set the machine to automatically receive documents  
from the unattended remote fax machine at any time. This  
feature permits unattended polling in the evening hours when  
telephone rates are lower.  
NOTE: The machine must be ready for polling.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Delay Rx Poll”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the number of the remote machine to be polled using  
the number keypad.  
To enter the number, you can use a one-touch keypad or  
speed dial number. For details, see page 4.15.  
4
Press Enter to confirm the number on the display. The  
display asks you to enter another fax number.  
NOTE: The Another No. prompt does not appear if you have  
added numbers for another broadcasting or delay fax job. You  
must wait until the job is completed.  
5
To enter more fax numbers, press 1 to select “Yes” and  
repeat steps 4 and 5. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Note that you cannot use group dial numbers for another  
fax number.  
6
7
When you finish entering fax numbers, press 2 to select  
“No” at a Another No. prompt.  
Enter the time using the number keypad.  
4.26  
FAXING  
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, your  
machine will poll at that time on the following day.  
8
9
When the remote machine is secured with a 4-digit poll  
code, enter the correct code and press Enter.  
If not, press Enter to accept “0000” which represents no  
code, or enter 0000.  
Press Enter when the starting time displays correctly.  
At the specified time, the machine will dial the numbers in  
the order you entered and receive documents from the  
remote machines.  
Adding Documents to a Scheduled Fax  
You can add documents to the delayed transmission previously  
reserved in your machine’s memory.  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
4
For details about loading a document, see page 4.5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 4.3.  
3
4
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Add Page” on  
the bottom line and press Enter.  
The display shows the last job reserved in the memory.  
FAXING 4.27  
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the fax job to  
which you want to add documents and press Enter.  
The machine automatically stores the documents in the  
memory, and the display shows the memory capacity and  
the number of pages.  
After storing, the machine displays the numbers of total  
pages and added pages and then returns to Standby mode.  
Canceling a Scheduled Fax  
1
2
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Cancel Job” and  
press Enter. The display shows the last job reserved in the  
memory.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the fax job  
you want to cancel, and press Enter.  
When the display confirms your selection, press 1 to select  
“Yes.” The selected job is canceled and the machine returns  
to Standby mode.  
To cancel your selection, press 2 to select “No.”  
4.28  
FAXING  
Additional Features  
Using Secure Receiving Mode  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being  
accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on Secure  
Receiving mode to restrict printing out all of the received faxes  
when the machine is unattended. In Secure Receiving mode, all  
of the incoming faxes go into the memory. When the mode turns  
off, any faxes stored are printed.  
To turn Secure Receiving mode on:  
1
2
3
4
Press Menu until “Advanced Fax” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Secure Receive”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “On” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
4
Enter a four-digit passcode you want to use and press  
Enter.  
NOTE: You can activate Secure Receiving mode without setting a  
passcode, but cannot protect your faxes.  
5
6
Re-enter the passcode to confirm it and press Enter.  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
When a fax is received in Secure Receiving mode, your machine  
stores it into the memory and displays “Secure Receive” to let  
you know that there is a fax stored.  
FAXING 4.29  
To print received documents:  
1
2
3
Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 and 2  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Print” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the four-digit passcode and press Enter.  
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in the memory.  
To turn Secure Receiving mode off:  
1
2
3
Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 and 2  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Off” on the  
bottom line and press Enter.  
Enter the four-digit passcode and press Enter.  
The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all of the  
faxes stored in the memory.  
4
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
4.30  
FAXING  
Printing Reports  
Your machine can print reports containing useful information.  
The following reports are available:  
Phone Book List  
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the  
machine’s memory as speed dial and group dial numbers.  
You can print this Phone Book list using the Phone Book  
button; see page 4.21.  
Sent Fax Report  
This report shows information of the faxes you recently sent.  
Received Fax Report  
This report shows information of the faxes you recently  
received.  
System Data List  
4
This list shows the status of the user-selectable options. You  
may print this list to confirm your changes after changing any  
settings.  
Scheduled Job Information  
This list shows the document currently stored for Delayed faxes .  
The list shows the starting time and type of operation.  
Message Confirmation  
This report shows the fax number, the number of pages, the  
elapsed time of the job, the communication mode, and the  
communication results.  
You can set up your machine to automatically print the message  
confirmation report after each fax job. See page 4.3.  
FAXING 4.31  
Junk Fax Number List  
This list shows up to 10 fax numbers specified as the junk fax  
numbers by using the Junk Fax Setup menu; see page 4.34.  
When the Junk Fax Barrier feature is turned on, incoming faxes  
from those numbers are blocked.  
This feature recognize the last 6 digits of the fax number set as  
a remote fax machine’s ID.  
Multi-communication Report  
This report is printed automatically after sending documents  
from more than one location.  
Power Failure Report  
This report is printed out automatically when power is restored  
after a power failure, if there occurs any data loss due to the  
power failure.  
NOTE: The lists you have set to print out automatically don’t print  
out when there is no paper loaded or a paper jam has occurred.  
Printing a Report  
1
Press Menu until “Reports” appears on the top line of the  
display. The first available menu item, “Phone Book”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the report or list  
you want to print on the bottom line.  
• Phone Book: Phone Book list  
• Sent Report: Sent fax report  
• RCV Report: Received fax report  
• System Data: System data list  
• Scheduled Jobs: Scheduled job information  
• MSG Confirm: Message confirmation  
• Junk Fax List: Junk fax number list  
3
Press Enter.  
The selected information prints out.  
4.32  
FAXING  
Using Advanced Fax Settings  
Your machine has various user-selectable setting options for  
sending or receiving faxes. These options are preset at the  
factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the  
options are currently set, print the System Data list. For details  
about printing the list, see page 4.31  
Changing Setting Options  
1
Press Menu until “Advanced Fax” appears on the top line of  
the display. The first available menu item, “Send Forward,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the desired  
menu item on the bottom line and press Enter.  
When the option you want appears on the display, choose a  
status by pressing the scroll button ( or ) or enter a  
value using the number keypad.  
4
5
Press Enter to save the selection.  
You can exit from Setup mode at any time by pressing  
Clear/Stop.  
4
FAXING 4.33  
Advanced Fax Setting Options  
Option  
Description  
Send Forward  
You can set the machine to always forward all of the  
outgoing faxes to a specified destination, in addition to the  
fax numbers you entered.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the number  
of the remote fax machine to which faxes are forwarded.  
RCV Forward  
You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to  
another fax number during a specified period of time.  
When a fax arrives at your machine, it is stored in the  
memory. Then, the machine dials the fax number that you  
have specified and sends the fax.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the fax  
number to which faxes are forwarded. Then, you can enter  
the starting time and/or the ending time. The Print Local  
Copy option allows you to set the machine to print the  
fax, if fax forwarding is completed without any error.  
Junk Fax Setup  
Using the Junk Fax Barrier feature, the system will not  
accept faxes sent from remote stations of which their  
numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers.  
This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.  
Select Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a  
fax.  
Select On to turn the feature on. You can set up to 10 fax  
numbers as junk fax numbers using the Set option. This  
feature recognize the last 6 digits of the fax number set  
as a remote fax machine’s ID. After storing numbers,  
you do not receive any faxes from the registered stations.  
To delete all the junk fax numbers, use the All Delete  
option.  
Secure Receive  
Prefix Dial No.  
You can keep your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people.  
You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This  
number dials before any automatic dial number is started.  
It is useful for accessing the PABX exchange.  
4.34  
FAXING  
Option  
Description  
Stamp RCV Name  
This option allows the machine to automatically print the  
page number, and the date and time of the reception at  
the bottom of each page of a received document.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on.  
ECM Mode (Error  
Correction Mode)  
Error Correction Mode helps with poor line quality and  
makes sure any fax you send are sent smoothly to any  
other ECM-equipped fax machine. If the line quality is  
poor, it takes more time to send a fax when you are using  
the ECM mode.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on.  
4
FAXING 4.35  
Using the Remote Control Panel  
Using the Remote Control Panel, you can create and edit Phone  
Book entries or update the firmware program of your machine  
on the desktop of your computer.  
When you install SF-565P software, the Remote Control Panel  
program is automatically installed.  
For information about installing SF-565P software, see  
To open the Remote Control Panel:  
1
2
3
Start your Windows.  
From the Start menu, select Programs.  
Select Type 1200 and then Remote Control Panel.  
The Remote Control Panel program opens.  
4
The Remote Control Panel window provides the two tabs;  
Phone Book and Firmware Update.  
To exit, click the Exit button at the bottom of each tab.  
For further details, click the Help button at the bottom of  
each tab.  
4.36  
FAXING  
The Phone Book Tab  
Click the Phone Book tab to create and edit Phone Book  
entries.  
Reads the Phone  
Book entries from  
the machine to the  
Remote Control  
Panel.  
Downloads the  
PhoneBookentries  
from the Remote  
Control Panel to  
the machine.  
Shows Phone Book  
entries  
Allows you to  
edit the selected  
Phone Book  
entry in a  
Allows you to set  
up group dial  
numbers. See  
below.  
separate Edit  
window.  
Deletes the selected  
Phone Book entry.  
Deletes all Phone  
Book entries.  
4
When you click Group Dial, the following window opens.  
Enter a name for  
the group.  
Shows the Phone  
Shows the numbers  
included in the group.  
To remove a number,  
select it and click  
Book entries you  
can include in the  
group. After  
selecting a number,  
click Add to move it  
to the Included  
numbers list.  
Remove  
.
Click to save the group dial number after  
adding or removing numbers for the group.  
FAXING 4.37  
The Firmware Update Tab  
Click the Firmware Update tab to update the firmware of your  
machine. This feature should be used by an authorized  
technician. Please consult with the purchase point.  
4.38  
FAXING  
Printing a Document in Windows  
The following procedure describes the general steps required for  
printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps for  
printing a document may vary depending on the application  
program you are using. Refer to your software application’s  
user’s guide for the exact printing procedure.  
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
Select Print from the File menu.  
The Print window opens. It may look slightly different  
depending on your application.  
You can select the basic print settings within the Print  
window. These settings include the number of copies and  
the print range.  
Make sure that your  
machine is selected.  
œ¤Windows 98  
3
4
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
machine, click Properties or Preferences in the  
application’s print window and go to step 4.  
If you see a Setup, Printer or Options button, click it  
instead. Then click Properties on the next screen.  
Now you see the Printer Driver Type 2200 Properties  
window, which allows you to access all of information you  
need when using your machine.  
PRINTING  
5.2  
The Layout tab first displays.  
The preview image  
shows the sample page  
with the settings you  
specified.  
5
If necessary, select the Orientation option.  
The Orientation option allows you to select the direction in  
which information is printed on a page.  
Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape prints across the length of the page,  
spreadsheet style.  
If you want to turn the page upside down, select 180 from  
the Rotate drop-down list.  
œ
¤Portrait  
œ
¤Landscape  
5
From the Paper tab, select the paper source, size and type.  
For further details, see page 5.7.  
PRINTING  
5.3  
6
If necessary, you can set the sequence for the pages to  
print from the Extra tab. Select the print order you want to  
use from the Print Order drop-down list.  
Normal: Your machine prints from the first page to the  
last page.  
Reverse All Pages: Your machine prints from the last  
page to the first page.  
Print Odd Pages: Your machine prints only the odd  
pages of the document.  
Print Even Pages: Your machine prints only the even  
pages of the document.  
7
8
9
Click other tabs on the top of the Printer Driver Type 2200  
Properties window to access other features, if needed.  
When you finish setting the properties, click OK until the  
Print window displays.  
Click OK to start printing.  
The printer’s Properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Operating Instructions shows the  
Properties window on windows 98  
Notes:  
• Most Windows applications overrides the settings you specified  
in the printer driver. Change all of the print settings available in  
software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes permanent,  
make them in the Printers folder. Follow these steps:  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
2. For Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings and then  
Printers.  
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes.  
3. Select the Printer Driver Type 2200 printer.  
4. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and:  
• For Windows 95/98/Me, select Properties.  
• For Windows 2000/XP, select Printing Preferences.  
• For Windows NT 4.0, select Document Default.  
5. Change the settings on each tab and click OK.  
PRINTING  
5.4  
Canceling a Print Job  
There are two ways to cancel a print job:  
To stop a print job from the control panel:  
Press the Clear/Stop button.  
Your machine finishes printing the  
page that is moving through the  
machine and deletes the rest of the  
print job. Pressing the button cancels  
only the current job. If more than one  
print job is in the machine’s memory,  
you need to press the button once for  
each job.  
5
To stop a print job from the Printers folder:  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such  
as the Printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:  
1
2
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 9x/NT4.0/2000/Me, Select Settings and then  
Printers.  
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes.  
3
4
Double-click the Printer Driver Type 2200 icon.  
From the Document menu:  
For Windows 9x/Me, select Cancel Printing.  
For Windows NT4.0/2000/XP, select Cancel.  
œ¤Windows 98  
NOTE: You can access this window simply by double-clicking the  
printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.  
PRINTING  
5.5  
Using a Favorite Setting  
The Favorites option, which is visible on each tab, allows you  
to save the current properties settings for future use.  
To save a Favorites item:  
1
2
Change the settings on each tab, as needed.  
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.  
3
Click Save.  
To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop-down  
list.  
To delete a favorite setting item, select it from the list and click  
Delete.  
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
selecting <Printer Default> from the list.  
Using Help  
Your machine has a help screen that can be activated using the  
Help button in the printer’s Properties window. The help screen  
gives detailed information about the printer features provided  
by the printer driver.  
You can also click  
in the upper right hand corner, and then  
click on any setting.  
PRINTING  
5.6  
Setting Paper Properties  
Use the following options for paper handling. See page 5.2 for  
more information about accessing printer’s Properties.  
Click the Paper tab to access many paper properties.  
1
5
2
3
4
5
Property  
Copies  
Description  
Copies allows you to choose the number of  
copies to be printed. You can enter up to 999.  
1
2
Size allows you to choose the size of the paper  
loaded in the tray.  
Size  
If the required size is not listed in the Size box,  
click Add Custom. When the Custom Page  
Size window appears, set the size and click Ok  
The setting appears on the list so that you can  
select it.  
.
Enter the custom  
name you want to  
use.  
Enter the paper  
size.  
PRINTING  
5.7  
Property  
Source  
Description  
Make sure that Source is set to the  
corresponding paper tray.  
3
Use the Manual Feed source when printing to  
special material. You need to load one sheet at  
a time into the manual feeder. See page 2.8.  
If you installed an optional Tray 2 and set the  
Tray 2 in the Printer’s properties , you can select  
Tray 2  
.
If the paper source is set to Auto Select, the  
machine automatically picks up print material in  
the following order: the manual feeder and the  
paper tray.  
Make sure that Type is set to Printer  
Default. If you load a different type of print  
material, select the corresponding paper type.  
For more information about print materials, see  
4
Type  
If you use cotton paper, set the paper type to  
Thick for the best printing.  
To use recycled paper, which weighs from 75g/  
m2 to 90g/m2 (20lb to 24lb), or colored paper,  
select Color Paper.  
This property allows you to print the first page  
using a different paper type from the rest of the  
document. You can select the paper source for  
the first page.  
5
First Page  
For example, load thick stock for the first page  
into the manual feeder and plain paper into Tray  
1. Then, select  
1
in the Source option and  
Manual Feed in the First Page option.  
PRINTING  
5.8  
Setting Graphic Properties  
Use the following graphic options to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs. See page 5.2 for more information  
about accessing printer properties.  
Click the Graphics tab to display the properties shown below.  
1
2
5
3
Property  
Description  
You can select the printing resolution by  
choosing from 600 dpi (Normal) or 300  
dpi (Draft). The higher the setting, the  
sharper the printed characters and graphics.  
Higher settings may increase the time it takes  
to print a document.  
1
2
Resolution  
Selecting this option extends the life of your  
toner cartridge and reduces your cost per  
page without a significant reduction in the  
print quality.  
Toner Save  
On: Select this option to allow the  
machine to use less toner on each page.  
Off: When you do not need to save toner  
to print a document, select this option.  
PRINTING  
5.9  
Property  
Description  
You can make advanced settings by clicking  
the Advanced Options button.  
3
Advanced  
Options  
Darkness  
Use this option to lighten or darken the  
image appearance in your print.  
Normal: This setting is for normal  
documents.  
Lighten: This setting is for bolder line  
widths or darker grayscale images.  
Dark: This setting is for finer line width,  
higher definition in graphics and lighter  
grayscale images.  
When the Darken Text option is checked, all  
text in your document is allowed to print  
darker than a normal document (Applicable  
only to DBCS* Windows such as Chinese,  
Japanese and Korean).  
* DBCS stands for Double Byte Character Set.  
PRINTING  
5.10  
Property  
Description  
True Type Options(for Win9x/Me only)  
3
Advanced  
Options  
(continued)  
This option determines what the driver tells  
the machine about how to image the text in  
your document. Select the appropriate setting  
according to the status of your document.  
Download as Bit Image: When this  
option is selected, the driver downloads the  
font data as bitmap images. Documents with  
complicated fonts, such as Korean or  
Chinese, or various types of fonts print  
faster in this setting.  
5
Print as Graphics: When this option is  
selected, the driver downloads any fonts as  
graphics. When printing documents with  
high graphic content and relatively few  
TrueType fonts, printing performance  
(speed) may be enhanced in this setting.  
Print All Text Black  
When the Print All Text Black option is  
checked, all text in your document prints in  
solid black, regardless of the color it appears  
on the screen. When it is not checked,  
colored text prints in shades of gray.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of  
paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages are  
smaller and arranged in the order you specified on the sheet.  
You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
1
3
2
4
1
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
2
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side  
from the Type drop-down list.  
PRINTING 5.11  
3
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (1,  
2, 4, 9 or 16) on the Pages per Side drop-down list.  
4
Select the page order on the Page Order drop-down list, if  
necessary.  
Left, Then  
Down  
Down, Then  
Left  
Down, Then  
Right  
Right, Then  
Down  
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  
page on the sheet.  
NOTE: Page Order and Print Page Border are enabled only  
when the number of pages per side is 2, 4, 9 or 16.  
5
6
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size and type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
PRINTING  
5.12  
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged  
Document  
You can scale your print job on a page.  
1
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Layout tab, select Reduce/Enlarge on the  
Type drop-down list.  
5
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
You can also click the œ¤or button.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
PRINTING 5.13  
Fitting Your Document to a Selected  
Paper Size  
You can scale your print job to any paper size regardless of the  
digital document size. This can be useful when you want to  
check the fine details on a small document.  
A
1
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Layout tab, select Fit to Page on the Type drop-  
down list.  
Select the correct size from the Target Page drop-down list.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source and type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
0.15 inches  
PRINTING  
5.14  
Printing Posters  
You can print a single-page document onto 4, 9 or 16 sheets of  
paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form  
one poster-sized document.  
1
2
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Layout tab, select Poster on the Type drop-  
down list.  
5
3
Configure the poster option:  
You can select the page layout from 2x2, 3x3 or 4x4. If  
you select 2x2, the image is automatically stretched to  
cover 4 physical pages.  
œ¤2 x 2  
œ¤3 x 3  
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier  
to reconstruct the resulting poster.  
0.15 inches  
PRINTING 5.15  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the  
poster by posting the sheets together.  
Using Watermarks  
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  
document. For example, you may want to have large gray letters  
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIALprinted diagonally across  
the first page or all of the pages of a document.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with your  
machine, and they can be modified or you can add new ones to  
the list.  
Using an Existing Watermark  
1
2
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
Click the Extras tab and select a watermark on the  
Watermark drop-down list. It appears in the preview  
image window.  
Preview  
image  
3
Click Ok and start printing.  
PRINTING  
5.16  
Creating a Watermark  
1
2
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Watermark  
section. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
5
3
4
Enter text message you want to print in the Watermark  
Message box.  
The message displays in the preview image window.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark  
prints on the first page only  
.
Select the watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style and size and gray scale  
level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of  
the watermark from the Message Angle section.  
5
6
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.  
When you finish creating, click Ok and start printing.  
To stop printing the watermark, select <No Watermark> on  
the Watermark drop-down list.  
PRINTING 5.17  
Editing a Watermark  
1
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer properties. See page 5.2.  
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Watermark  
section. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
Select the watermark you want to edit on the Current  
Watermarks list, to change the watermark message and  
the options. Refer to page 5.17.  
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.  
Click Ok.  
Deleting a Watermark  
1
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
From the Extras tab, click Edit in the Watermark section.  
The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
Select the watermark you want to delete on the Current  
Watermarks list and click Delete.  
4
5
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.  
Click Ok.  
PRINTING  
5.18  
Using Overlays  
What is an Overlay?  
An overlay is text and/or images stored on the computer hard  
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on  
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using  
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the  
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you need only tell  
the machine to print the letterhead overlay on your document.  
Dear ABC  
5
Regards  
WORLD BEST  
Creating a New Page Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay  
containing your logo or image.  
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for  
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you  
wish them to appear when printed as an overlay. If needed,  
save the file for later use.  
WORLD BEST  
2
3
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Overlay section.  
PRINTING 5.19  
4
In the Edit Overlays window, click Create Overlay.  
5
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight  
characters in the File name box. Select the destination  
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).  
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.  
Click Ok or Yes to finish creating.  
The file is not printed out. Instead it is stored in your  
computer HDD disk.  
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the  
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay  
with a watermark.  
PRINTING  
5.20  
Using a Page Overlay  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with  
your document. To print an overlay with a document:  
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.  
When you change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer’s Properties. See page 5.2.  
3
4
Click the Extras tab.  
5
Select the overlay you want to print from the Overlay  
drop-down list box.  
5
When the overlay file you want doesn’t appear on the  
Overlay List, click Edit and Load Overlay, and select the  
overlay file.  
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  
external source, you can also load the file when you access  
this Load Overlay window. After you select the file, click  
Open. The file appears on the Overlay List and is available  
for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box.  
PRINTING 5.21  
6
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When  
Printing. When this box is checked, a message window  
appears each time you submit a document for printing,  
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your  
document.  
Answering Yes to the window means that the selected  
overlay prints with your document. Answering No to the  
window cancels overlay printing.  
If this box is empty and an overlay has been selected, the  
overlay will be automatically printed with your document.  
7
Click OK or Yes until the printing starts.  
The overlay downloads with your print job and prints on  
your document.  
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the same  
as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
Deleting a Page Overlay  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
1
2
3
In the printer’s properties window, click the Extras tab.  
Click Edit in the Overlay section.  
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List  
box.  
4
5
6
Click Delete Overlay.  
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
PRINTING  
5.22  
Setting Up the Locally Shared Printer  
You can connect the machine directly to a selected computer,  
which is called “host computer,” on the network. Your machine  
can be shared by other users on the network through a Windows  
9x, Me, 2000, XP or NT 4.0 network printer connection.  
NOTE:Whether the printer is locally connected or network-  
connected, you need to install the printer software on each  
computer that will print documents to the printer.  
5
In Windows 9x/Me  
Setting Up the Host Computer  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu, select Control Panel and  
double-click on the Network icon.  
3
4
Check the File and Print Sharing box and click OK.  
Click Start and select Printers from Settings. Double-  
click your printer icon.  
5
6
Select Properties in the Printer menu.  
Click the Sharing tab and check the Shared As box. Fill in  
the Share Name field and then click OK.  
PRINTING 5.23  
Setting Up the Client Computer  
1
2
3
Right-click Start and select Explorer.  
Open your network folder in the left column.  
Right-click the shared name and select Capture Printer  
Port.  
4
Select the port you want, check the Reconnect at log on  
box and then click OK.  
5
6
7
8
From the Start menu, select Settings and then Printers.  
Double-click your printer icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Properties.  
From the Details tab, select the printer port and click OK.  
PRINTING  
5.24  
In Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP  
Setting Up the Host Computer  
1
2
Start Windows.  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000, from the Start menu, select  
Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP, from the Start menu, select Printers and  
Faxes.  
5
3
4
5
Double-click your printer icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Sharing.  
For Windows NT 4.0, check the Shared box.  
For Windows 2000, check the Shared As box.  
For Windows XP, check the Share this printer box.  
6
For Windows NT 4.0, fill in the Share Name field and click  
OK.  
For Windows 2000/XP, fill in the Shared Name field and  
click OK.  
PRINTING 5.25  
Setting Up the Client Computer  
1
2
3
4
Right-click Start and select Explorer.  
Open your network folder in the left column.  
Click the shared name.  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000, from the Start menu, select  
Settings and Printers.  
For Windows XP, from the Start menu, select Printers and  
Faxes.  
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click your printer icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Properties.  
Press the Ports tab and click Add Port.  
Select Local Port and click New Port.  
Fill in the Enter a port name field and enter the shared  
name.  
10 Click OK and click Close.  
11 For Windows NT 4.0, click OK.  
For Windows 2000/XP, click Apply and click OK.  
PRINTING  
5.26  
SCANNING  
6
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and  
text into digital files on your computer. Then you can fax  
or e-mail the files, display them on your web site or use  
them to create projects that you can print using  
software.  
This chapter includes:  
Scanning Basics  
Your machine offers a following way to begin scanning:  
• From TWAIN-compliant software: You can use other software  
including Adobe PhotoDeluxe and Adobe Photoshop.  
NOTES  
:
To scan with your machine, you must install the Type 2200  
Driver.  
• Scanning is done through the same LPT or USB port currently  
assigned for your printer port.  
Scanning Process with TWAIN-  
enabled Software  
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will  
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
PhotoDeluxe or Adobe Photoshop. The first time you scan with  
your machine, select it as your TWAIN source in the application  
you use.  
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:  
• Place your photograph or page in the ADF.  
• Open an application, such as PhotoDeluxe or Photoshop.  
• Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
• Scan and save your scanned image.  
You need to follow the program’s instructions for acquiring an  
image. Please refer to the operating instructions of the  
application.  
6.2  
SCANNING  
MAINTENANCE  
7
This chapter provides information for maintaining your  
machine and the toner cartridge.  
This chapter includes:  
Clearing the Memory  
You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s  
memory.  
1
2
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Clear  
Memory” on the bottom line and press Enter.  
The first available menu item, “Clear All Mem.” displays on  
the bottom line.  
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the item you  
want to clear.  
• Clear All Mem.: Clears all of the data stored in memory  
and resets all of your settings to the factory default.  
• Paper Setting: Restores all of the Paper Setting options to  
the factory default.  
• Copy Setup: Restores all of the Copy Setup options to the  
factory default.  
• Fax Setup: Restores all of the Fax Setup options to the  
factory default.  
• Fax Feature: Cancels all of the scheduled fax jobs in the  
machine’s memory.  
• Advanced Fax: Restores all of the Advanced Fax setting  
options to the factory default.  
• Sound/Volume: Resets the sound and volume settings to  
the factory default.  
• Machine Setup: Resets all of the system settings, such as  
the machine ID, time and date, display language and  
save modes, to the factory default.  
• Sent Report: Clears all the records of your faxes sent.  
• RCV Report: Clears all the records of your faxes received.  
• Phone Book: Clears the one-touch, speed and group dial  
numbers stored in memory.  
4
5
Press Enter. The selected memory is cleared and the  
display asks you to continue clearing the next item.  
To clear another item, press Enter and repeat steps 3 and 4.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Clear/Stop.  
7.2  
MAINTENANCE  
Adjusting Shading  
When the scanning glass becomes dirty, it can alter the shading  
value. If your copy has black lines or is blurred, adjust the  
shading setting.  
1
2
Load a sheet of white paper into the ADF.  
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Adjust Shading ”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to select “On” and press  
Enter.  
Your machine picks up the paper and adjusts the shading  
value.  
Cleaning Your Machine  
To maintain the print quality, follow the cleaning procedures  
below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print quality  
problems occur.  
NOTES  
:
• While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to touch  
the transfer roller, located underneath the toner cartridge. Oil  
from your fingers can cause print quality problems.  
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with surfactants containing  
large amounts of alcohol, solvent or other strong substances can  
discolor or crack the cabinet.  
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and  
aerosols. A fire or an electric shock might occur.  
7
Cleaning the Outside  
Clean the cabinet of the machine with a soft lint-free cloth. You  
can dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to  
be let any water drip onto or into the machine.  
MAINTENANCE 7.3  
Cleaning the Inside  
During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can  
accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print  
quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning  
the inside of the machine clears or reduces these problems.  
1
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for  
the machine to cool down.  
2
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out,  
lightly pushing it down.  
3
With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled  
toner from the toner cartridge area and the toner cartridge  
cavity.  
NOTE: To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it  
to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of  
paper, if necessary. Do not touch the black transfer roller inside  
the machine.  
4
5
Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the cover.  
Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.  
7.4  
MAINTENANCE  
Cleaning the Scanning Glass  
Keeping the scanning glass clean helps ensure the best possible  
copies. We suggest that you clean the scanning glass at the start  
of each day and during the day, as needed.  
1
2
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with  
water.  
Open the control panel by gripping its top and pulling it.  
3
Carefully wipe the scanning glass with a soft dry cloth.  
If the glass is very dirty, first wipe it with a slightly  
dampened cloth, and then with a dry cloth. Be very careful  
not to scratch the glass surface.  
7
4
Close the control panel firmly until it clicks into place.  
MAINTENANCE 7.5  
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge  
Toner Cartridge Storage  
To get the most from the toner cartridge, keep the following  
guidelines in mind:  
• Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until  
ready for use.  
• Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty  
does not cover damage caused by using a refilled  
cartridge.  
• Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your  
machine.  
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to  
light for more than a few minute.  
7.6  
MAINTENANCE  
Redistributing Toner  
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life, white streaks  
or light print occurs. The LCD displays the warning message,  
“[Toner Low].” You can temporarily reestablish the print quality  
by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge.  
1
Open the front cover.  
2
Pull the toner cartridge out and gently roll the cartridge 5 or  
6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.  
NOTE: If the toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry  
cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets the toner into  
fabric.  
7
3
Reinstall the cartridge and close the front cover.  
MAINTENANCE 7.7  
   
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
When the toner eventually runs out, only blank pages print  
when a print job is sent or when a fax is received. At this stage,  
the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. The display on the  
control panel shows the warning message, “[Toner Empty]” and  
the machine stops printing.  
NOTE: You can set the machine to ignore the “[Toner Empty]”  
message and continue printing. See page 7.10.  
1
2
Open the front cover.  
Lightly pushing the used cartridge down, pull the cartridge  
out.  
3
Unpack the new toner cartridge and gently roll it  
horizontally four or five times to distribute the toner evenly  
inside the cartridge.  
Save the box and the plastic bag for shipping.  
4
Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks into place.  
5
Close the front cover.  
7.8  
MAINTENANCE  
Setting the Notify Toner Option  
If you have set the Notify Toner menu option to “On, your  
machine automatically sends a fax to your service company or  
the dealer to notify them that your machine requires a new  
toner cartridge when the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.  
The fax number is preset by your dealer when you bought your  
machine.  
1
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
The first available menu item, “Clean Drum,displays on  
the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Notify Toner ”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to change the setting.  
Select “On” to enable this feature. Selecting “Off” disables  
this feature.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection.  
Cleaning the Drum  
If there are streaks or spots on your print, the OPC drum of the  
cartridge may require cleaning.  
1
Before setting the cleaning procedure, make sure that  
paper is loaded in the machine.  
2
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
The first available menu item, “Clean Drum,displays on  
the bottom line.  
7
3
4
Press Enter.  
When the display asks you to confirm your selection, press  
Enter.  
The machine prints a cleaning page. Toner particles on the  
drum surface are affixed to the paper.  
5
If the problem remains, repeat steps 1 through 4.  
MAINTENANCE 7.9  
Ignoring the Toner Empty Message  
When the toner cartridge is empty, the machine shows a “[Toner  
Empty]” message and stops printing.  
You can set the machine to ignore the message when it displays  
and to continue printing the pages.  
1
2
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Ignore Toner”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter.  
3
Press the Scroll button ( or ) to select “On” or “Off.”  
Select “On” to ignore the Toner Empty message.  
Select “Off” to stop printing when the message appears.  
This is the default setting.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection.  
7.10  
MAINTENANCE  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
8
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you  
encounter an error.  
This chapter includes:  
Clearing Document Jams  
When a document jams while it passes through the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder), “[Document Jam]” appears on  
the display.  
1
2
Remove the remaining documents from the ADF.  
Pull the jammed document gently out of the ADF and skip  
to step 5.  
If there is any resistance and the document does not move  
when you pull it, continue to the next step.  
3
Open the control panel by gripping its top and pulling on it.  
4
5
Pull the document gently out of the ADF and close the  
control panel.  
Load the documents back into the ADF.  
NOTE: To prevent document jams, do not use thick, thin or mixed  
documents.  
8.2  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Clearing Paper Jams  
When a paper jam occurs, “Paper Jam” appears on the display.  
Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.  
Message  
Location of Jam  
Go to  
[Paper Jam 0]  
Open/Close Door  
In the paper tray.  
(Tray 1 or Tray 2)  
In the fuser area or  
around the toner  
cartridge.  
[Paper Jam 1]  
Open/Close Door  
In the manual feeder  
In the paper exit area  
[Paper Jam 2]  
Check Inside  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently  
and slowly. Do as the instructions in the following sections to  
clear the jam.  
In Tray 1  
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper  
automatically exits the machine.  
If the paper does not exit, continue to step 2.  
Pull Tray 1 open.  
2
3
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
8
If there is any resistance and the paper does not move when  
you pull it or if you cannot see the paper in this area, skip to  
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.3  
4
5
Insert the paper tray into the machine until it snaps into place.  
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.  
In Tray 2  
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper  
automatically exits the machine.  
If the paper does not exit, continue to step 2.  
Pull Tray 2 open.  
1
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
3
4
Insert the paper tray into the machine until it snaps into  
place.  
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.  
8.4  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
In the Paper Exit Area  
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper  
automatically exits the machine.  
If the paper does not exit, continue to step 2.  
2
Gently pull the paper out of the front output tray. Skip to  
step 6.  
If there is any resistance and the paper does not move  
when you pull it or if you cannot see the paper in the front  
output tray, continue to step 3.  
3
4
Open the rear cover.  
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
5
6
Close the rear cover.  
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.5  
 
In the Fuser Area or Around the Toner  
Cartridge  
WARNING: The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper  
from the machine.  
1
2
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out,  
lightly pushing it down.  
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
3
Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover.  
Printing automatically resumes.  
In the Manual Feeder  
” appears on the display when you try to print  
using the manual feeder and the machine does not detect paper,  
due to no paper or improper paper loading.  
The error message may also occur when the paper is not  
properly fed into the machine through the manual feeder. In that  
case, pull the paper out of the machine.  
8.6  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams  
By selecting the correct paper types, most paper jams can be  
avoided. When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined in  
• Follow the procedures on page 1.11 when you load paper.  
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly.  
• Do not overload the paper tray. Ensure that the paper is  
below the paper capacity mark on the inside wall of the paper  
tray.  
• Do not remove the paper from the tray while your machine is  
printing.  
• Flex, fan and straighten the paper before loading.  
• Do not use creased, damp or highly curled paper.  
• Do not mix paper types in the paper tray.  
• Use only recommended print materials. See “Paper  
• Ensure that the print side of print materials is facing down in  
the paper tray and facing up in the manual feeder.  
• If paper jams frequently occur when you print on the A5-  
sized paper:  
- Load the paper into the tray as shown below.  
- Set the page orientation to Landscape in the printer’s  
Properties window. See page 5.3.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.7  
Clearing LCD Error Messages  
Messages appear on the display of the control panel to indicate  
the machine’s status or errors. Refer to the following table to  
understand the messages and correct the problem, if necessary.  
Messages and their meanings are listed in alphabetical order.  
Display  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Your machine’s memory is  
full and cannot store the  
document into memory.  
To cancel the fax job, press the  
button to accept “Yes.”  
1
If you want to send the pages that  
were stored, press the button to  
Cancel ?  
1:Yes 2:No  
2
accept “No.” You should send the  
remaining pages later when  
memory is available.  
The machine has a  
communication problem.  
Ask the sender to try again.  
[Comm. Error]  
CRU Fuse Error  
The machine has a  
problem with recognizing  
the new toner cartridge.  
Please contact a service  
representative or re-install the  
catridge.  
The loaded document has  
jammed in the ADF  
(Automatic Document  
Feeder).  
Clear the document jam. See  
[Document Jam]  
[Door Open]  
The front or rear cover is  
not securely latched.  
Close the cover until it locks into  
place.  
You have tried to select a  
group location number  
where only a single  
location number can be  
used, such as when  
Just use a one-touch or speed dial  
number or dial a number manually  
using the number keypad.  
Group Not  
Available  
adding locations for a  
broadcasting operation.  
8.8  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Display  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
The remote machine does  
not have the requested  
feature, such as a delayed  
transmission.  
Reconfirm the remote machine’s  
features.  
It also occurs if the  
remote machine does not  
have enough memory  
space to complete the  
operation you are  
[Incompatible]  
attempting.  
[Jam 1] or  
[No Cartridge]  
The toner cartridge is not  
installed.  
Install the toner cartridge. See  
The remote person did not  
answer or the line is  
already engaged.  
Try again after a few minutes.  
[Line Busy]  
Your machine cannot  
connect with the remote  
machine or has lost  
contact because of a  
problem with the phone  
line.  
Try again. If the problem persists,  
wait an hour or so for the line to  
clear and try again.  
[Line Error]  
Or, turn the ECM on. See  
You have attempted to set  
up a copy or fax operation  
with no document loaded.  
Load a document and try again.  
Load Document  
Low Heat Error  
There is a problem in the  
fuser unit.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it  
back in. If the problem persists,  
please contact a service  
representative.  
Open Heat Error  
[Over Heat]  
A problem has occurred in  
the LSU (Laser Scanning  
Unit).  
Unplug the power cord and plug it  
back in. If the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
[LSU Error]  
The memory is full.  
Delete unnecessary documents,  
retransmit after more memory  
becomes available or split the  
transmission into more than one  
operation.  
Memory Full  
[No Answer]  
The remote fax machine  
has not answered after  
several redial attempts.  
Try again. Make sure that the  
remote machine is operational.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.9  
Display  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
The one-touch or speed  
dial location you tried to  
use has no number  
assigned to it.  
Dial the number manually using  
the number keypad or assign the  
number. For storing a number, see  
No. Not  
Assigned  
[No Paper]  
Add Paper  
The paper tray has run out  
of paper.  
Load paper in the paper tray. See  
You are in the Add/Cancel  
operation, but there are  
no jobs waiting.  
Check the display to see if there  
are any scheduled jobs. The  
display should indicate them in  
Standby mode, for example, Delay  
Fax.  
Operation  
Not Assigned  
Paper has jammed in the  
feeding area of the paper  
tray.  
Clear the jam. See page 8.3.  
[Paper Jam 0]  
Open/Close Door  
Clear the jam. See page 8.6.  
• Paper has jammed in  
the paper exit area.  
• A paper jam has  
occurred in the  
[Paper Jam 1]  
Open/Close Door  
manual feeder or the  
machine detects  
non-feeding from  
the manual feeder.  
[Paper Jam 2]  
Check Inside  
Paper has jammed in the  
fuser area.  
Clear the jam. See page 8.5.  
Power has turned off then  
on and the machine’s  
memory has not been  
saved.  
You need to restart the job you  
were trying to do before the power  
failure.  
[Power Failure]  
[Retry Redial?]  
The machine is waiting for  
a specified time interval to  
redial a previously busy  
station.  
You can press Enter to  
immediately redial, or Clear/  
Stop to cancel the redial  
operation.  
The Clear/Stop button is  
pressed during a copy or  
fax operation.  
Try again.  
[Stop Pressed]  
[Toner Empty]  
The toner cartridge has  
run out. The machine  
stops printing.  
Replace with a new toner  
cartridge. See page 7.8.  
The toner cartridge is  
almost empty.  
Take out the toner cartridge and  
gently shake it. By doing this, you  
can temporarily reestablish  
printing operations.  
[Toner Low]  
8.10  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Solving Problems  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until  
the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, please call for  
service.  
Paper Feeding Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Clear the paper jam. See page 8.3.  
Paper is jammed during  
printing.  
Paper sticks together.  
• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the paper tray.  
The paper tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper,  
depending on the thickness of your paper.  
• Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. See  
• Remove paper from the paper tray and flex or fan the paper.  
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.  
Multiple sheets of paper  
do not feed.  
• Different types of paper may be loaded in the paper tray.  
Load the paper of only one type, size and weight.  
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam, clear the paper  
Paper does not feed into  
the machine.  
• Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.  
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the  
tray and reload it correctly.  
• There is too much paper in the paper tray. Remove excess  
paper from the tray.  
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the  
specifications required by the machine. See “Paper  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
• There is too much paper in the paper tray. Remove excess  
paper from the tray.  
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that  
meets the specifications required by the machine. See  
special materials, use the manual feeder.  
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front  
cover and remove the debris.  
8
Transparencies stick  
together in the paper  
exit.  
Use only the transparencies specifically designed for a laser  
printer. Remove each transparency as it exits from the  
machine.  
Envelopes skew or fail to  
feed correctly.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the  
envelopes.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.11  
 
Printing Problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine  
does not print.  
The machine is not  
receiving power.  
Check the power cord connections. Check  
the power switch and the power source.  
The machine is not  
selected as the default  
printer.  
Select Printer Driver Type 2200 as  
your default printer in your Windows.  
Check the machine for  
the following:  
After locating the problem, clear it.  
• Close the cover.  
• The front cover is not  
closed.  
• Paper is jammed.  
• No paper is loaded.  
• The toner cartridge  
is not installed.  
• Clear the paper jam. See page 8.3.  
• Load paper. See page 1.11.  
• Install the toner cartridge. See page 1.9.  
If a printer system error occurs, contact  
your service representative.  
The connection cable  
between the computer  
and the machine is not  
connected properly.  
Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect  
it.  
The connection cable  
between the computer  
and the machine is  
defective.  
If possible, attach the cable to another  
computer that is working properly and print  
a document. You can also try using a  
different printer cable.  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer setting to make  
sure that the print job is sent to the correct  
port, for example, LPT1. If the computer  
has more than one port, make sure that the  
machine is attached to the correct one.  
The machine may be  
configured incorrectly.  
Check the printer properties to ensure that  
all of the print settings are correct.  
The printer driver may  
be incorrectly installed.  
Repair the printer software. See page 1.24.  
The machine is  
malfunctioning.  
Check the display message on the control  
panel to see if the machine is indicating a  
system error.  
The machine  
selects print  
materials from  
the wrong  
The paper source  
selection in the printer  
properties may be  
incorrect.  
For many software applications, the paper  
source selection is found under the Paper  
tab within the printer properties. Select the  
correct paper source. See page 5.8.  
paper source.  
8.12  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
A print job is  
extremely slow.  
The job may be very  
complex.  
Reduce the complexity of the page or try  
adjusting the print quality settings.  
The maximum print speed of your machine  
is 17 PPM for Letter-sized paper 16 PPM for  
A4-sized paper.  
If you are using  
From the Start menu, choose Settings  
and Printers. Right-click the Printer  
Driver Type 2200 printer icon, choose  
Properties, click the Details tab, and  
then choose the Spool Settings button.  
Select the spool setting you want.  
Windows 9x/Me, the  
Spooling Setting may  
be set incorrectly.  
Half the page is  
blank.  
The page orientation  
setting may be  
incorrect.  
Change the page orientation in your  
application. See page 5.3.  
The paper size and the  
paper size settings do  
not match.  
Ensure that the paper size in the printer  
driver settings matches the paper in the  
tray.  
The machine  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled or  
The printer cable is  
loose or defective.  
Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect.  
Try a print job that you have already printed  
successfully. If possible, attach the cable  
and the machine to another computer and  
try a print job that you know works. Finally,  
try a new printer cable.  
incomplete.  
The wrong printer  
driver was selected.  
Check the application’s printer selection  
menu to ensure that your machine is  
selected.  
Software application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from another application.  
The operating system is  
malfunctioning.  
Exit Windows and reboot the computer.  
Turn the machine off and then back on  
again.  
Pages print, but  
are blank.  
The toner cartridge is  
defective or out of  
toner.  
Redistribute the toner. if necessary. See  
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.  
The file may have blank  
pages.  
Check the file to ensure that it does not  
contain blank pages.  
8
Some parts, such as  
the controller or the  
board, may be  
Contact a service representative.  
defective.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.13  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The illustrations  
print incorrectly  
in Adobe  
The setting in software  
application is wrong.  
Select Download as Bit Image in the  
Advanced Options window of the Graphic  
properties and print the document.  
Illustrator.  
An error occurs  
repeatedly  
when you are  
printing with  
the USB  
When the USB mode is  
set to “Fast,some PC  
users may experience  
poor USB  
Change the USB mode to “Slow.” To do so,  
follow these steps:  
1. Press Menu on the control panel until  
“Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
communication.  
connection.  
2. Press the scroll button ( or  
“USB Mode” appears on the bottom line,  
and press Enter  
) until  
.
3. Press the scroll button ( or  
select “Slow.”  
) to  
4. Press Enter to save the selection.  
5. Press Clear/Stop to return to Standby  
Mode.  
Printing Quality Problems  
The dirty inside of the machine or improper paper loading may reduce the print  
quality. See the table below to clear the problem.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Light or faded  
print  
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page:  
• The toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily  
extend the toner cartridge life. See “Redistributing Toner” on  
page 7.7. If this does not improve the print quality, install a  
new toner cartridge.  
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example,  
the paper is too moist or too rough. See “Paper  
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too  
low or Toner Save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and  
turn Toner Save mode off. See page 5.9 respectively.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that  
the toner cartridge needs cleaning. See “Cleaning the Drum”  
• The surface of the scanning glass may be dirty. Clean the  
8.14  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
 
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Toner specs  
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the  
paper is too moist or too rough. See “Paper Specifications” on  
• The transfer roller or paper path may be dirty. Clean the  
inside of your machine and the drum. See page 7.4 and  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
Dropouts  
If generally rounded faded areas, occur randomly on the page:  
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the  
job.  
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has  
moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. See  
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing process can cause  
some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of  
paper.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Vertical repetitive  
defects on the next page.  
• If these steps do not correct the problems, contact a service  
representative.  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The drum inside the toner cartridge has probably been  
scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
Gray background  
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:  
• Change to a lighter weight pages. See “Paper Specifications”  
• Check the machine’s environment; very dry (low humidity) or  
high humidity (higher than 80 % RH) conditions can increase  
the amount of background shading.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
Toner smear  
• Clean the inside of the machine. See page 7.4.  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper Specifications”  
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.15  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at  
even intervals:  
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a repetitive mark  
occurs on the page, print a cleaning sheet several times to  
After the printout, if you still have the same problems,  
remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects  
occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct  
itself after a few more pages.  
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service  
representative.  
Background  
scatter  
Background scatter results from bits of toner distributed on the  
printed page.  
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different  
batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until  
necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the  
printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can  
cause problems.  
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a  
printed page, adjust the print resolution through your  
software application or the printer properties.  
A
Misformed  
characters  
• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow  
images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try a different  
• If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy  
effect, the scanner unit may need service. For service,  
contact a service representative.  
Page skew  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper Specifications”  
• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly  
and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the  
paper stack.  
8.16  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
 
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Curl or wave  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and  
humidity can cause paper curl. See “Paper Specifications” on  
Turn the stack of paper over in the paper tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
Wrinkles or  
creases  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper Specifications”  
Turn the stack of paper over in the paper tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. See  
Black pages  
• The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove  
the cartridge and reinsert.  
• The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
• The machine may require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Loose toner  
• Clean the inside of the machine. See page 7.4.  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper Specifications”  
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.  
Contact a service representative.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.17  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within the parts of characters  
that should be solid black:  
• If you are using transparencies, try another type of  
transparency. Due to the composition of the transparency,  
some character voids are normal.  
• You may be printing on the wrong surface on the paper.  
Remove the paper and turn it around.  
• The paper may not meet paper specifications. See “Paper  
A
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:  
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove and  
reinsert the cartridge.  
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner  
cartridge and install a new one. See “Replacing the Toner  
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.  
Contact a service representative.  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curl or paper does not feed into the  
printer:  
Turn the stack of paper over in the paper tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the paper tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
8.18  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Copying Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Copies are too light or too  
dark.  
Use the Darknen button to darken or lighten the  
background of the copies.  
Smears, lines, marks or spots  
appears on copies.  
• If defects are on the original document, press the  
Darknen button to lighten the background of your  
copies.  
• If no defects are on the original document, clean the  
Scan unit. See page 7.5.  
Copy image is skewed.  
Blank copies print out.  
• Ensure that the original document is positioned  
correctly in the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder).  
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.  
Ensure that the original document is face down in the  
ADF.  
Image rubs off the copy  
easily.  
• Replace the paper in the paper tray with paper from a  
new package.  
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the  
machine for the extended periods of time.  
Frequent copy paper jams  
occurs.  
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the paper  
tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply.  
Check/adjust the paper guides, if necessary.  
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight.  
75g/m2 (20 lb) bond paper is recommended.  
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper  
remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been  
cleared.  
Fewer copies from the toner  
cartridge than expected prints  
out.  
• Your original documents may contain pictures, solids  
or heavy lines. For example, they may be forms,  
newsletters, books or other documents that use more  
toner.  
• The machine may be frequently turned on and off.  
8
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.19  
 
Scanning Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The scanner does not work.  
• Make sure that you place the document to be scanned  
face down in the ADF.  
• There may not be enough available memory to hold  
the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan  
function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan  
resolution rate.  
• Check that the USB or parallel cable is connected  
properly.  
• Make sure that the USB or parallel cable is not  
defective. Switch the cable with a known good cable.  
If necessary, replace the cable.  
• If you are using a parallel cable, ensure that it is  
compliant with the IEEE 1284 standard.  
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly or the  
application you want to use to make certain that the  
scanner job is being sent to the correct port, for  
example, LPT1.  
The unit scans very slowly.  
• Check if the machine is printing received data. Scan  
the document after the current job is completed.  
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
• Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory required to  
analyze and reproduce the scanned image. Set your  
computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS  
setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details  
about how to set BIOS, refer to your computer  
operating instructions.  
Message appears on your  
computer screen:  
• There may be a copying or printing job in progress.  
When the current job is complete, try the job again.  
• The selected port is currently being used. Restart your  
computer and try again.  
• “Device can't be set to the  
H/W mode you want.”  
• The printer cable may be improperly connected or the  
power may be off. You must use a USB 2.0 compliant  
cable or a parallel cable that supports IEEE 1284 bi-  
directional communications.  
• The scanner driver is not installed or an operating  
environment is not set up properly.  
• “Port is being used by  
another program.”  
• “Port is Disabled.”  
• “Scanner is busy receiving  
or printing data. When the  
current job is completed,  
try again.”  
• Ensure that port is properly connected and power is  
on, and then restart your computer.  
• “Invalid handle.”  
• Do not use the parallel and the USB cables at the  
same time.  
• “Scanning has failed.”  
8.20  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Faxing Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is not  
working, there is no  
display and the buttons  
are not working.  
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
• Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.  
No dial tone sounds.  
• Check that the phone line is connected properly.  
• Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by  
plugging in another phone.  
The numbers stored in the  
memory do not dial  
correctly.  
Make sure that the numbers are stored in the memory  
correctly. Print a Phone Book list, referring to page  
The Phone bookdocument  
does not feed into the  
machine.  
• Make sure that the document is not wrinkled and you are  
putting it in correctly. Check that the document is the  
right size, not too thick or thin.  
• Make sure that the control panel is firmly closed.  
Faxes are not received  
automatically.  
• Fax mode should be selected.  
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
• Check to see if the display shows “Memory Full.”  
The machine does not  
send.  
• Make sure that the document is loaded in the ADF.  
• “TX” should show up on the display.  
• Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if  
it can receive your fax.  
The incoming fax has  
blank spaces or is received  
with a poor-quality.  
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.  
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
• Check your machine by making a copy.  
• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner  
cartridge, referring to page 7.8.  
Some of the words on an  
incoming fax are  
stretched.  
The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary  
document jam.  
There are lines on the  
documents you send.  
Check your scanning glass for marks and clean it. See  
8
The machine dials a  
number, but a connection  
with another fax machine  
fails.  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper or  
cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other  
machine operator and ask her/him to clear out the  
problem.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 8.21  
   
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Documents do not store in  
memory.  
There may not be enough memory space to store the  
document. If the display shows a “Memory Full” message,  
delete any documents you no longer need from the  
memory and then restore the document.  
Blank areas appear at the  
bottom of each page or on  
other pages, with a small  
strip of text at the top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user  
8.22  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Installing an Optional Tray  
You can increase the paper handling capacity of your machine by  
installing an optional Tray 2. This tray holds 250 sheets of paper.  
1
Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the  
machine.  
2
Remove the packing material from the tray and remove the  
tape fixing the interface cable to the tray.  
3
Find the location of the optional tray positioners.  
4
Place the machine over the tray, aligning the feet on the  
machine with the positioners of the tray.  
A.2  
     
5
Plug the interface cable of the tray into the Tray 2 cable  
connector on the back of the machine.  
6
7
Load paper in the optional Tray 2. The instructions for  
loading paper in this tray is the same as you would when  
loading the standard paper tray. See page 1.11.  
Reconnect the power cord and cables and then turn the  
machine on.  
Setting Tray 2 in the Printer’s Properties  
If you installed Tray 2 with your machine on, the machine does  
not recognize it. In this case, you need to set the tray in the  
printer’s Properties window so that you can use it for PC-  
printing.  
1
2
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000, select Settings and  
then Printers.  
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes.  
3
4
Select the Printer Driver Type 2200 printer.  
Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select  
Properties.  
5
Click the Printer tab, select Tray 2 from the Optional Tray  
drop down list and click OK.  
A
A.3  
 
Setting the Paper Type and Size for Tray 2  
After installing the optional Tray 2 and loading paper in the tray,  
you need to set the paper type and size using the control panel  
buttons. These settings will apply to Fax and Copy modes. For  
PC-printing, you need to select the paper type and size in the  
application program you use.  
1
Press Menu.  
The display shows “Paper Setting” on the top line and the  
first menu item, “Paper Type,on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Use the scroll button (or  
)
to find the paper type you are  
using and press Enter to save it.  
4
5
6
Press the  
to access the menu item.  
button to scroll to “Paper Size” and press Enter  
Press the scroll button (or ) until “Tray 2 Size” appears  
on the bottom line.  
Use the scroll button (or ) to find the paper size you  
are using and press Enter to saves it.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear.  
A.4  
   
Specifications  
General Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Up to 50 sheets (weight: 75 g/m2, 20 lb)  
Automatic document  
feeder (ADF)  
Width: 142 to 216 mm (5.6 to 8.5 inches)  
Length: 148 to 356 mm (5.8 to 14 inches)  
ADF Document size  
Paper input capacity  
Paper output capacity  
Paper tray: 250 sheets (weight: 75 g/m2, 20 lb)  
Manual feeder: 1 sheet (weight: 60~163 g/m2, 16~43 lb)  
Optional Paper tray: 250 sheets (weight: 75 g/m2, 20 lb)  
Front output tray: 150 sheets (face down)  
Rear output slot: 1 sheet (face up)  
Paper tray: Plain paper (60 ~ 90 g/m2, 16 ~ 24 lb)  
Manual feeder: Plain paper, Transparencies, Labels, Thick,  
Thin, Bond, Preprinted, Colored.  
Paper type  
Card stock, Envelopes (60 ~ 163 g/m2, 16 ~ 43 lb)  
1-piece toner cartridge system  
Consumables  
100 ~ 127 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A  
220 ~ 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.5 A  
Power requirements  
Sleep mode: 15W(100 ~ 127 VAC) / 15W(220 ~ 240 VAC)  
Standby mode: 75 W(100 ~ 127 VAC) / 75 W(220 ~ 240 VAC)  
Average: 320 W  
Power consumption  
Noise  
Warm-up: 52 dB  
Standby mode: 39 dB  
Scanning: 52 dB  
Printing: 52 dB  
Warm-up Time  
Operating conditions  
LCD  
35 seconds  
Temperature: 50 oF to 89 oF (10 oC to 32 oC)  
Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH  
16 characters x 2 lines  
Main: 388 x 417 x 335 mm  
SET dimension  
(W x D x H)  
A
Optional Paper Tray(Tray2): 386 x 392 x 90 mm  
A.5  
     
Item  
Description  
Net: 11 Kg (including toner cartridge, excluding package)  
Optional Paper Tray(Tray2): 2.5 Kg  
Weight  
Paper: 2.7 Kg  
Plastic: 0.7 Kg  
Package weight  
Scanner Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Compatibility  
Scan method  
Scan resolution  
Scan length  
Scan width  
TWAIN standard  
Color CIS  
600 X 300 dpi (optical)/4800 X 4800 (maximum)  
Maximum: 15.7 inches (400 mm)  
Maximum: 8.5 inches (216 mm)  
Effective: 8.2 inches (208 mm)  
Bit depth  
1 bit for B/W mode  
8 bit for Gray mode  
24 bit for Color mode  
Copier Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Scan method  
Scan length  
Scan width  
Color CIS  
Maximum: 15.7 inches (400 mm)  
Maximum 8.5 inches (216 mm)  
Effective 8.2 inches (208 mm)  
Copy speed (SDMC)*1  
Copy speed (MDMC)*2  
Letter: 17 copies per minute  
A4: 16 copies per minute  
Letter: 8 copies per minute  
A4: 7 copies per minute  
Copy resolution  
Zoom rate  
600 x 300 dpi (optical)/ 600 X 600 (printing)  
50 ~ 200 %  
A.6  
       
Item  
Multiple copies  
Bit depth  
Description  
99 pages  
1 bit for Text mode  
8 bit for Gray mode  
Halftone  
256 levels  
*1 Single Document Multi Copy  
*2  
Multi Document Multi Copy  
Printer Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Print method  
Print speed  
Laser Beam Printing  
Letter: 17 pages per minute  
A4: 16 pages per minute  
Paper size  
Paper tray: Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, A5, A6  
Manual feeder: Letter, Legal, A4, Folio, Executive, A5, A6, A6  
card, Post Card 4x6, Hagaki, Envelope 7-3/4, Envelope 9,  
Envelope 10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C6,  
Envelope B5  
* Min.: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)  
Max.: 216 x 356 (8.5 x 14 in.)  
Print resolution  
Emulation  
600 x 600 dpi  
SPL (GDI)  
PC Interface  
IEEE 1284 (ECP Only), USB 2.0  
Windows 95/98/2000/NT 4.0/Me/XP  
Compatibility  
First printing time  
Standby mode: 12 seconds  
Power save mode: 42 seconds  
Memory  
16 MB  
A
A.7  
   
Facsimile Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Compatibility  
Applicable line  
ITU-T Group 3  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind  
PABX  
Data coding  
MH/MR/MMR (ECM Mode)/JBIG  
Modem speed  
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/  
14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps with fall back  
Transmission speed  
Approx. 3 seconds/page  
* Transmission time applies to memory transmission of  
text data with ECM compression using only ITU-T No.1  
Chart.  
Scan speed  
Paper Type  
Approx. 1.5 seconds/LTR (at standard fax resolution  
mode)  
Planin paper(60~90 g/m2, 16~24lb)  
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, B5  
Paper size  
Resolution  
Standard: 203 x 98 dpi  
Fine: 203 x 196 dpi  
Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi  
Photo: 203 x 196 dpi  
User Memory  
Halftone  
5 MB  
256 levels  
Auto dialer  
One-touch dialing (up to 40 numbers)  
Speed dialing (up to 150 numbers)  
A.8  
   
Paper Specifications  
Overview  
Your machine accepts a variety of print materials, such as cut-sheet paper, including  
up to 100 % recycled fiber content paper, envelopes, labels, transparencies and  
custom-size paper. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain and moisture  
content, are important factors affecting the machine’s performance and the output  
quality. Paper that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this operating instructions  
can cause the following problems:  
• Poor print quality  
• Increased paper jams  
• Premature wear on the machine.  
NOTES  
:
• Some paper may meet all of the guidelines in this guide and still not produce  
satisfactory results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable  
temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which the manufacturer has  
no control.  
• Before purchasing large quantities of paper, insure the paper meets the requirements  
specified in this operating instructions.  
CAUTION: Using paper that does not meet these specifications may cause problems,  
requiring repairs. These repairs are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty or  
service agreements.Supported Sizes of Paper  
Size (mm/in.)  
Plain paper  
Weight  
Capacity  
Letter (215.9 x 279/8.5 x 11)  
A4 (210 x 297/8.27 x 11.69)  
Folio (215.9 x 330.2/8.5 x 13)  
Legal (215.9 x 355.6/8.5 x 14)  
Executive (184.2 x 266.7/7.25 x 10.5)  
B5(182 x 257/7.2 x 10)  
• 60 to 90 g/m2 bond  
(16 to 24 lb) for the  
paper tray (Tray 1/2)  
• 60 to 163 g/m2 bond  
(16 to 43 lb) for the  
manual feeder  
• 250 sheets of 75 g/m2  
bond (20 lb) paper for  
the paper tray (Tray  
1/2)  
• 1 sheet of paper for  
the manual feeder  
A5 (148 x 210/5.83 x 8.27)  
A6 (105 x 148/4.13 x 5.88)  
Envelopes  
No.9 (98.4 x 225.4/3.88 x 8.88)  
No.10 (104.8 x 241.3/4.13 x 9.5)  
DL (110 x 220/4.33 x 8.66)  
C5 (162 x 229/6.38 x 9.02)  
C6 (114 x 162/4.49 x 6.38)  
B5 (176 x 250/6.93 x 9.84)  
No.7 3/4 (98.4 x 190.5/3.88 x 7.5)  
1 sheet of paper for the  
manual feeder  
75 to 90 g/m2  
A
A.9  
   
Size (mm/in.)  
Weight  
Capacity  
Labels  
Letter (215.9 x 279/8.5 x 11)  
A4 (210 x 297/8.27 x 11.69)  
120 to 150 g/m2  
Transparency films  
Letter (215.9 x 279/8.5 x 11)  
A4 (210 x 297/8.27 x 11.69)  
138 to 146 g/m2  
90 to 163 g/m2  
1 sheet of paper for the  
manual feeder  
Card stocks  
A6 card (105 x 148/4.13 x 5.88)  
Post Card (101.6 x 152.4/4 x 6)  
Hagaki (100 x 148/3.94 x 5.83)  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (Legal)  
60 to 120 g/m2 bond  
(16 to 32 lb)  
NOTES  
:
• You may experience jams when using print materials with a length of less than 127  
mm (5 in.). For optimum performance, ensure that you are storing and handling the  
paper correctly. Please refer to “Paper Storage Environment” on page .12.  
• Capacity may vary depending on print materials’ weight and thickness, and  
environmental conditions.  
Guidelines for Using Paper  
For best results, use conventional 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. Ensure that the paper is of  
good quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles,  
voids, and curled or bent edges.  
If you are unsure of what type of paper you are loading, such as bond or recycled  
paper, check the label on the package.  
The following problems may cause print quality deviations, jamming or even damage  
to the machine:  
Symptom  
Problem with Paper  
Solution  
Poor print quality or toner  
adhesion, problems with  
feeding  
Too moist, too rough, too  
smooth or embossed; faulty  
paper lot  
Try another kind of paper,  
between 100 ~ 400 Sheffield, 4  
~ 5 % moisture content.  
Dropout, jamming, curl  
Stored improperly  
Store paper flat in its moisture-  
proof wrapping.  
Increased gray background  
shading/machine wear  
Too heavy  
Use lighter paper, use the rear  
output slot.  
A.10  
Symptom  
Problem with Paper  
Solution  
Excessive curl problems with Too moist, wrong grain  
• Use the rear output slot.  
• Use long-grain paper.  
feeding  
direction or short-grain  
construction  
Jamming, damage to  
machine  
Cutouts or perforations  
Do not use paper with cutouts or  
perforations.  
Problems with feeding  
Ragged edges  
Use good quality paper.  
NOTES  
:
• Do not use letterhead paper printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in  
certain types of thermography.  
• Do not use raised or embossed letterhead.  
• The machine uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Insure that any  
colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with this fusing  
temperature (200 °C or 392 °F for 0.1 second).  
Paper Specifications  
Category  
Specifications  
Acid Content  
Caliper  
5.5 pH or lower  
0.094 ~ 0.18 mm (3.0 ~ 7.0 mils)  
Flat within 5 mm (0.02 in.)  
Curl in Ream  
Cut Edge Conditions  
Fusing Compatibility  
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray.  
Must not scorch, melt, offset or release hazardous  
emissions when heated to 200 °C (392 °F) for 0.1  
second.  
Grain  
Long Grain  
Moisture Content  
Smoothness  
4 % ~ 6 % by weight  
100 ~ 400 Sheffield  
A
A.11  
Paper Output Capacity  
Output Location  
Capacity  
150 sheets of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper  
1 sheet of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper  
Face-down output tray  
Face-up output slot  
Paper Storage Environment  
Paper storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.  
Ideally, the machine and paper storage environment should be at or near room  
temperature, and not too dry or humid. Remember that paper is hygroscopic; it  
absorbs and loses moisture rapidly.  
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to  
evaporate, while cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air  
conditioners remove most of the humidity from a room. As paper is opened and used,  
it loses moisture, causing streaks and smudging. Humid weather or water coolers can  
cause the humidity to increase in a room. As paper is opened and used it absorbs any  
excess moisture, causing light print and dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains  
moisture it can become distorted. This can cause paper jams.  
Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be used in a short time  
(about 3 months). Paper stored for long periods may experience heat and moisture  
extremes, which can cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to  
large supplies of paper.  
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use.  
Opened packages of paper have more potential for damage, especially if they are not  
wrapped with a moisture-proof barrier.  
The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum  
performance. The required condition is 20 to 24 °C (68 to 75 °F), with a relative  
humidity of 45 % to 55 %. The following guidelines should be considered when  
evaluating the paper’s storage environment:  
• Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.  
• The air should not be too dry or too humid.  
• The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its  
moisture-proof wrapping. If the machine environment is subject to extremes,  
unwrap only the amount of paper to be used during the day’s operation to prevent  
unwanted moisture changes.  
A.12  
 
Envelopes  
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only  
between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer.  
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When  
selecting envelopes, consider the following components:  
• Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90g/m2 (24lb) or  
jamming may occur.  
• Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6mm  
(0.25in.) curl, and should not contain air.  
• Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked or otherwise damaged.  
Temperature: You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and  
pressure of the machine.  
• Size: You should only use envelopes within the following size ranges  
NOTES  
:
• Use only the manual feeder to print envelopes.  
• You may experience some paper jams when using any media with a length less than  
140 mm (5.5 in.). This may be caused by paper that has been affected by  
environmental conditions. For optimum performance, make sure you are storing and  
handling the paper correctly. Please refer to “Paper Storage Environment” on page .12.  
Envelopes with Double Side Seams  
Double side-seams construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope  
rather than diagonal seams. This style may be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure the  
seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as illustrated below.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Envelopes with Adhesive Strips or Flaps  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to  
seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the machine. The  
extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing or even jams and may even  
damage the fuser.  
A
A.13  
Envelope Margins  
The following gives typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope.  
Type of Address  
Return address  
Minimum  
15 mm (0.6 in.)  
51 mm (2 in.)  
Maximum  
51 mm (2 in.)  
Delivery address  
90 mm (3.5 in.)  
NOTES  
:
• For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 in.) from the  
edges of the envelope.  
• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.  
Envelope Storage  
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be  
stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope  
may wrinkle during printing.  
Labels  
CAUTION  
:
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels recommended for laser printers.  
To prevent serious jams, always use the manual feeder to print labels and always use  
the rear output tray.  
• Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once and never print on a partial  
sheet of labels.  
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:  
• Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 180°C (356°F), the  
machine’s fusing temperature.  
• Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can  
peel off sheets with spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.  
• Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13mm (5in.) of curl in  
any direction.  
• Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles or other indications of  
separation.  
A.14  
Transparencies  
Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand 180°C (356°F), the  
machine’s fusing temperature.  
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies recommended for  
use in laser printers.  
A
A.15  
printing  
N
reduced or enlarged document  
O
one-touch dial  
problems, solve  
P
paper load  
R
paper size, set  
receiving a fax  
redialing  
reduced/enlarged  
paper type, set  
resolution  
printer properties  
H916-8650  
Safety Information  
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.  
Safety During Operation  
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:  
WARNING:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are  
not followed, could result in death or serious injury.  
CAUTION:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not  
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.  
WARNING:  
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension  
cord.  
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power  
cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.  
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not remove  
any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.  
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the  
cable) if any of the following occurs:  
•You spill something into the machine.  
•You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.  
•The external housing of your machine has been damaged.  
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when  
exposed to an open flame.  
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.  
• Dispose of the used toner bottle in accordance with the local regulations.  
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or  
an electric shock might occur.  
ii  
CAUTION:  
• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving  
the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the  
machine.  
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the  
cable).  
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the  
machine.  
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner bottle out of the reach of children.  
• Be careful not to cut yourself on any sharp edges when you reach inside the product to  
remove misfed sheets of paper or masters.  
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended supply waste at  
household waste collection points. Disposal can take place at an authorized dealer.  
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label  
indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise, an injury might occur.  
Power Supply  
The socket-outlet shall be in stalled near the product and shall be easily accessible.  
Ozone Safety  
This product generates ozone during operation Normally, the ozone level is safe for operators.  
.
If ozone odor may appear, ventilate the room.  
For Fax or Telephone  
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or  
laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Avoid using a telephone during an  
electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use a  
telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.  
Laser Safety:  
This equipment is considered a class 1 laser device. This equipment contains a 5 milliwatt, 760-800  
nanometer wavelength, AlGaAs laser diode. The following marking is attached on the back of the  
equipment.  
Caution:  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in  
this Operating Instructions might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
iii  
Declaration of Conformity  
Notice to Users in EEA Countries  
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC  
of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.  
Notice to Users Accessing Analog PSTN in EEA Countries  
This product is designed to be able to access analog PSTN in all EEA countries. Local PSTN  
compatibility is dependent on software switch settings. Please contact your service  
representative if relocating this product to another country. In the event of problems, please  
contact your service representative in the first instance.  
FAX2210L/LF215m : The CE declaration of Comformity is available on the Internet at URL :  
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc  
IF3050 : The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL:  
http://jboard.danka.de/jboard/produkte/index.htmlo and selecting the product applicable.  
Positions of Labels and Hallmarks for  
WARNING and  
CAUTION Labels  
This machine has labels for  
WARNING and  
CAUTION at the positions shown below. For  
safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.  
*
*
*This label is stuck to hot surfaces. Be careful not to touch these areas.  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power  
switch:  
means POWER ON.  
means POWER OFF.  
iv  
 
Control Panel Functions  
Use to store frequently-dialed fax number and  
dial them with a touch of the buttons.  
1
Allows you to shift the one-touch buttons to  
the numbers 21 through 40.  
Scrolls through the options available for the  
selected menu item.  
Confirms the selection on the display.  
2
3
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
menus available.  
Returns you to the upper menu level.  
Displays the current status and prompts  
during an operation.  
1
Allows you to select the fax receiving mode.  
• Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax  
numbers using a one or two-digit speed dial  
or group number for automatic dialing and  
edit the stored numbers.  
• Allows you to print a Phone book list.  
4
F
Adjusts the resolution of the documents for  
the current fax job.  
A
X
Allows you to send a fax to multiple  
destinations.  
Engages the telephone line.  
Redials the last number in Standby mode or  
inserts a pause into a fax number in Edit  
mode.  
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric  
characters.  
5
Adjusts the brightness of the documents for  
the current copy job.  
*1This button is called “Darkness” in this manual.  
Selects the document type for the current  
copy job.  
6
C
O
P
Y
*2This button is called “Original Type” in this manual.  
Makes a copy smaller or larger than the  
original document.  
Selects the number of copies.  
Stops an operation at any time.  
In Standby mode, clears/stop the copy  
options, such as the darkness, the document  
type setting, the copy size and the number of  
copies.  
7
Starts a job.  
2
Changing the Display Language  
To change the language that displays on the display of the  
control panel, follow these steps:  
1
2
3
4
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Language” appears  
on the bottom line of the display.  
Press Enter. The current setting appears on the bottom  
line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the language you  
want appears on the display.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby Mode, press Clear/Stop.  
Setting the Date and Time  
The current date and time are shown on the display when your  
machine is on and ready to work. All of your faxes will have the  
date and time printed on them.  
NOTE: If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the  
correct time and date once the power is restored.  
1
2
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Date & Time”  
on the bottom line and press Enter.  
3
Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad.  
Month  
Day  
= 01 ~ 12  
= 01 ~ 31  
Year  
= requires all four digits  
Hour  
= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)  
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)  
Minute  
= 00 ~ 59  
NOTE: The date format may differ from each country.  
3
You can also use the scroll button ( or ) to move the  
cursor under the digit you want to correct and enter a new  
number.  
4
5
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator,  
pressing the  
to the indicator.  
or  
button immediately moves the cursor  
You can change the clock mode to 24-hour format (e.g.  
01:00 PM as 13:00).  
Press Enter when the time and date on the display is  
correct.  
When you enter a wrong number, the machine beeps and  
does not proceed to the next step. If this happens, just  
reenter the correct number.  
Printing a Report  
1
Press Menu until “Reports” appears on the top line of the  
display. The first available menu item, “Phone Book”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the report or list  
you want to print on the bottom line.  
Press Enter.  
The selected information prints out.  
4
Using Advanced Fax Settings  
Your machine has various user-selectable setting options for  
sending or receiving faxes. These options are preset at the  
factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the  
options are currently set, print the System Data list. For details  
about printing the list, see Operating Instruction.  
Changing Setting Options  
1
Press Menu until “Advanced Fax” appears on the top line of  
the display. The first available menu item, “Send Forward,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the desired  
menu item on the bottom line and press Enter.  
When the option you want appears on the display, choose a  
status by pressing the scroll button ( or ) or enter a  
value using the number keypad.  
4
5
Press Enter to save the selection.  
You can exit from Setup mode at any time by pressing  
Clear/Stop.  
Loading a Document  
1
Pull the document input support all the way out. Fold out  
the extender, if necessary.  
5
2
Load the documents up to 50 pages face down into the  
ADF and adjust the document guides to the document size.  
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document.  
3
Adjust the document resolution, referring to Operating  
Instruction.  
Sending a Fax Automatically  
1
Load the document(s) face down into the ADF.  
For details about loading a document, see page 5.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. See  
Operating Instruction.  
If you need to change the darkness, see Operating  
Instruction.  
3
4
Enter the remote fax phone number using the number  
keypad.  
You can use the one-touch keypad or speed or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see Operating  
Instruction.  
Press Start.  
The number is dialed and then the machine begins sending  
the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.  
NOTE: When you want to cancel the fax job, press Clear/Stop  
at any time while sending the fax.  
6
Confirming Transmission  
When the last page of your document has been sent  
successfully, the machine beeps and returns to Standby Mode.  
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error  
message appears on the display. For a listing of error messages  
and their meanings, see Operating Instruction.  
If you receive an error message, press Clear/Stop to clear the  
message and try to send the document again.  
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report  
automatically each time sending a fax is completed. For further  
details, see the MSG Confirm item Operating Instruction.  
Automatic Redialing  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer  
when you send a fax, the machine automatically redials the  
number every three minutes up to seven times by the factory  
default settings.  
When the display shows “Retry Redial ?,press Enter to redial  
the number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing,  
press Clear/Stop.  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of  
redial attempts. See Operating Instruction.  
Redialing the Last Number  
To redial the last number you dialed:  
Press Redial/Pause.  
If a document is loaded in the ADF, the machine automatically  
begins to send.  
Reference:  
See Operating Instruction for installing printer and scanner software.  
7
Memo  
8

Lexmark P 6250 User Manual
Mitel Answering Machine 6510 User Manual
Mitsubishi Electronics Mxz 32sv User Manual
Panasonic Kxflm600nz User Manual
Radio Shack 43 3888 User Manual
Samsung Sf 5100 User Manual
Samsung Sl M3320nd Slm3320nd User Manual
Samsung Uqt18wjwb User Manual
Soleus Air Sg Wac 06se User Manual
Toshiba Air Conditioner Ceiling Type User Manual